JP2021159605A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To secure the capacity of the control area for performing a game control process.SOLUTION: A game machine of the present invention includes a CPU, a ROM in which a program used in the CPU is stored, and a RAM in which variables updated by the program are held, on a predetermined substrate used for the progress of a game. The CPU reads the program from the ROM, on the basis of the program, executes multiple commands that do not allow interrupts in the interrupt-disabled state, calls the subroutine in another area with the last command of the multiple commands that do not allow interrupts, and executes an interrupt enable command before executing a return command of the subroutine in another area.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 106

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Generally, in a game machine (pachinko machine), a game ball is launched toward a game area in the game board by a player's handle operation, and the game ball that has flowed down the game area enters the start port. A lottery related to the symbol is executed. Then, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the special symbol display, and the special symbol determined by the lottery is stopped and displayed, so that the player is notified of the lottery result. At this time, when a specific special symbol indicating that the special symbol is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display, a major role game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game is started. In this big role game, the attacker device opens and closes a predetermined number of times, and the game ball can be entered into the big prize opening, so that the player can receive a large number of prize balls to be paid out.

In such a gaming machine, it is desired to effectively utilize a finite storage area in the memory in order to improve the playability. For example, a technique is known in which a control value is associated with control information of a data set table and a memory is effectively used (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-214339

In the gaming machine, the program related to the gaming control process for controlling the progress of the game must be arranged in the used area (control area 4.5 kbytes + data area 3.0 kbytes) in the ROM of the main control board.

However, due to the complexity of game information according to the variety of games, there is a risk that the used area, particularly the control area, will be oppressed.

In view of such a problem, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of securing a capacity of a control area for performing a gaming control process.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention has a CPU, a ROM in which a program used for the CPU is stored, and a variable updated by the program on a predetermined board used for the progress of the game. A gaming machine including a RAM to be held, the CPU reads the program from the ROM, executes a plurality of commands that do not allow interrupts in an interrupt-disabled state based on the program, and executes the interrupt. Is not allowed. The last command of a plurality of commands calls a subroutine in another area, and executes an interrupt enable command before executing the return command of the subroutine in the other area.

In order to solve the above problems, another gaming machine of the present invention is updated by the CPU, a ROM in which the program used for the CPU is stored, and the program on a predetermined substrate used for the progress of the game. A gaming machine including a RAM for holding variables, the CPU reads the program from the ROM, and based on the program, executes a plurality of commands that do not allow interrupts in an interrupt-disabled state. The last command of the plurality of commands that do not allow the interrupt calls the subroutine in another area, executes the interrupt enable command before executing the return command of the subroutine in the other area, returns from the subroutine, and then interrupts. Execute the allowed command.

According to the present invention, it is possible to secure the capacity of the control area for performing the game control process.

It is a perspective view of the gaming machine which shows the state which the door is opened which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the 2nd big prize opening which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the control means which controls the progress of the game which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. This is an address map of the memory area used by the main CPU according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the low probability jackpot determination random number determination table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the high probability jackpot determination random number determination table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the hit symbol random number determination table and the small hit symbol random number determination table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the reach group determination random number determination table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the reach mode determination random number determination table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the variation pattern random number determination table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation time determination table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the game state and the fluctuation time which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is 1st figure explaining the special electric accessory actuating ram set table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is the 2nd figure explaining the special electric accessory actuating ram set table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the game state setting table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the hit determination random number determination table which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. (A) is a diagram for explaining the normal symbol fluctuation time data table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the open / close control pattern table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state according to the original game property which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state when the game is not performed appropriately which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the gaming machine state flag which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is the first flowchart explaining the CPU initialization process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is the 2nd flowchart explaining the CPU initialization process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the subcommand group set processing in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the evacuation process at the time of power-off in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the setting-related processing in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the switch management process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the gate passing process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the 1st start port passing process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the 2nd start port passing process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol random number acquisition process in the main control board which concerns on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition in the main control board which concerns on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening passing process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the special game management phase and the special electric accessory game management phase which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special game management process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol change waiting process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol hit detection process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol variation number determination process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the count-cutting management process in the main control board which concerns on a simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special symbol change in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol forced stop processing in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol stop symbol display processing in the main control board which concerns on simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the special electric accessory game management process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening opening preprocessing in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening open / close switching process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening opening control process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening closing effective processing in the main control board which concerns on simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening end weight processing in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining the normal game management phase which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal game management process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol change waiting process in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the process during the normal symbol change in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol stop symbol display processing in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the processing before opening the winning opening of a normal electric accessory in the main control board which concerns on the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process in the main control board which concerns on simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening control process in the main control board which concerns on simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary electric accessory winning opening closure effective processing in the main control board which concerns on simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary electric accessory winning opening end weight processing in the main control board which concerns on simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation effect of the variation pattern without reach which concerns on the effect reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern which concerns on the effect reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation effect of the development reach variation pattern at the time of loss which concerns on the effect reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation effect of the development reach variation pattern at the time of a big hit which concerns on the effect reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation effect when the reach development effect which concerns on the effect reference example is executed twice. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation effect of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern which concerns on the effect reference example. It is a figure explaining the variation effect decision table which concerns on the effect reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the hold display effect which concerns on the effect reference example. (A) is a diagram for explaining the final hold display pattern determination table according to the effect reference example, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the previous hold display pattern determination table according to the effect reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the sub-CPU initialization process in the sub-control board which concerns on production reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the subtimer interrupt processing in the sub-control board which concerns on production reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead designation command reception process in the sub-control board which concerns on production reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the variation command reception process in the sub-control board which concerns on production reference example. It is an external view for demonstrating the schematic mechanical structure of a slot machine. It is an external view in the state which the front door is opened for demonstrating the schematic mechanical structure of a slot machine. It is a figure explaining the symbol arrangement and effective line of a reel. It is a block diagram which showed the schematic electrical structure of a slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the winning combination. It is a figure which shows the lottery table of a winning type. It is a figure which shows the lottery table of a winning type. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating transition of a game state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating transition of production state. It is a flowchart explaining the CPU initialization process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the cold start process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the error stop processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the setting value switching process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the initialization start process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the state return processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the game start processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the game medal insertion process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the internal lottery process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol code setting process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the process during rotation of a rotating cylinder in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the rotation cylinder stop processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the display determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the payout process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the game transition process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the evacuation process at the time of power-off in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the electrical connection around the main CPU. It is a block diagram which showed the internal structure of a CPU core. It is a figure explaining the structure of a register. It is explanatory drawing which shows the memory map. It is a flowchart which showed the initialization start processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the command for realizing STARTUP module and E_RMCLR module. It is a flowchart which showed the other example of the initialization start processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating another example of a command for realizing a STARTUP module and an E_RMCLR module. It is a flowchart which showed the setting value switching process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the command for realizing a RANKSET module and an E_RMCLR module. It is the flowchart which showed the other example of the setting value switching process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating another example of a command for realizing a RANKSET module and an E_RMCLR module. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the test signal output processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the test signal output processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the test signal output processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the test signal output processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the test signal output processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the test signal output processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the test signal output processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the test signal output processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the test signal output processing. It is a figure explaining the signal input to an input port. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating edge check processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating edge clear processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the RECOVER module. It is explanatory drawing explaining another example of edge check processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating another example of the EDGECHK module. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating another example of an EDGECLR module and a RECOVER module. It is a flowchart explaining another example of CPU initialization processing. It is explanatory drawing explaining the INITIAL module. It is a figure which compares the input port 1 and the output port 2.

Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. The dimensions, materials, other specific numerical values, etc. shown in the embodiment are merely examples for facilitating the understanding of the invention, and do not limit the present invention unless otherwise specified. In the present specification and drawings, elements having substantially the same function and configuration are designated by the same reference numerals to omit duplicate description, and elements not directly related to the present invention are not shown. do.

In the embodiment of the present invention, pachinko machines and slot machines are illustrated in this order as gaming machines, and then specific processing will be described in detail.

<Pachinko machine>
In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present invention, first, as reference examples of simultaneous rotation, the mechanical configuration and electrical configuration of a so-called simultaneous rotation machine, and specific processing on each substrate will be described. Then, as a reference example of the effect, a specific effect that can be executed by the simultaneous turning machine and a specific process related to the effect will be described. Then, as an example of the present invention, a configuration different from each reference example will be specifically described.

<Simultaneous rotation reference example>
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 100 according to the simultaneous turning reference example, and shows a state in which the door is opened. As shown in the figure, the gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 102 in which a surrounding space is formed by four sides assembled in a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 104 that is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 102 by a hinge mechanism. The middle frame 104 is provided with a front frame 106 that is openably and closably attached by a hinge mechanism.

Similar to the outer frame 102, the middle frame 104 has a surrounding space formed by four sides assembled in a substantially rectangular shape, and the game board 108 is held in the surrounding space. Further, the front frame 106 holds a transparent plate 110 made of glass or resin. When the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 are closed with respect to the outer frame 102, the game board 108 and the transmission plate 110 face each other substantially in parallel while maintaining a predetermined interval, and from the front side of the game machine 100. , The game board 108 becomes visible through the transparent plate 110.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. As shown in this figure, an operation handle 112 projecting to the front side of the gaming machine 100 is provided at the lower part of the front frame 106. The operation handle 112 is provided so that the player can rotate the operation handle 112, and when the player rotates the operation handle 112 to perform a firing operation, the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operation handle 112 is not shown (not shown). A game ball is launched by the launch mechanism. The game ball launched in this way rises between the rails 114a and 114b provided on the game board 108 and is guided to the game area 116.

The game area 116 is a space formed at a distance between the game board 108 and the transmission plate 110, and is an area in which the game ball can flow down or roll. The game board 108 is provided with a large number of nails and windmills (not shown) so that the game ball guided to the game area 116 collides with the nails and windmills and flows down and rolls in an irregular direction. I have to.

The game area 116 includes a first game area 116a and a second game area 116b in which the degree of entry of the game balls is different from each other according to the firing intensity of the firing mechanism and the game balls can be hit separately. The first gaming area 116a is located on the left side of the gaming area 116 as seen from the player facing the gaming machine 100, and the second gaming area 116b is the gaming area 116 as seen by the player facing the gaming machine 100. It is located on the right side of. Since the rails 114a and 114b are on the left side of the game area 116, the game ball launched by the launch mechanism with a firing intensity lower than the predetermined intensity enters the first game area 116a and is launched with a firing intensity equal to or higher than the predetermined strength. The resulting game ball enters the second game area 116b.

Further, the game area 116 is provided with a general winning opening 118, a first fixed starting port 120A, a first variable starting port 120B, a second starting port 122, and a normal drawing operating port 125 in which a game ball can enter. When a game ball enters these general winning openings 118, the first fixed starting opening 120A, the first variable starting opening 120B, the second starting opening 122, and the normal drawing operating opening 125, predetermined prize balls are paid out to the player. Is done. In the following, the first fixed starting port 120A and the first variable starting port 120B will be collectively referred to as the first starting port 120.

As will be described in detail later, a first starting area is provided in the first starting port 120, and a second starting area is provided in the second starting port 122. Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122 and the game ball enters the first starting area or the second starting area, any one of a plurality of special symbols provided in advance is provided. A lottery is held to determine the special symbol of 1. Each special symbol is associated with whether or not a large role game or a small hit game, which is advantageous for the player, can be executed. Therefore, when the game ball enters the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, the player obtains a predetermined prize ball and at the same time obtains an opportunity to acquire the right to receive various game benefits. It becomes.

Further, the first fixed starting port 120A, the second starting port 122, and the normal drawing operating port 125 are configured by a fixed starting port that is open so that the game ball can always enter. On the other hand, the first variable starting port 120B is provided with a movable piece 120b that can be opened and closed, and the ease of entry of the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B changes according to the state of the movable piece 120b. It consists of a variable starting port. Specifically, the movable piece 120b is normally maintained in a closed state, during which time it becomes difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 provided in the game area 116 (second game area 116b) or the game ball enters the normal drawing operation port 125, a lottery of the normal symbol described later is performed. If a winner is won by this lottery, the movable piece 120b is controlled to be in the open state for a predetermined time. When the movable piece 120b is opened, the game ball can enter the first variable starting port 120B. As described above, the movable piece 120b is in an open state that allows the game ball to enter the first variable start port 120B, and it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the first variable start port 120B than in the open state. Alternatively, it functions as a movable member (starting variable winning device) that shifts to an impossible closed state.

In addition, only the game ball flowing down the first game area 116a can enter the first fixed start port 120A, and the first variable start port 120B and the second start port 122 flow down the second game area 116b. It is arranged in a position where only the ball can enter. A game ball flowing down the second game area 116b may enter the first fixed start port 120A, but in this case, the game ball flowing down the first game area 116a is the second ball. It is desirable to arrange the game area 116b at a position where it is easier to enter the ball than the game ball flowing down.

Similarly, the first variable start port 120B and the second start port 122 may be filled with a game ball flowing down the first game area 116a, but in this case, a game flowing down the second game area 116b. It is desirable that the ball is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter the ball than the game ball flowing down the first game area 116a. In any case, the first fixed start port 120A is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down at least the first game area 116a can enter, and the first variable start port 120B and the second start port 122 are at least the first. 2 It is preferable that the game ball flowing down the game area 116b is arranged at a position where the ball can enter.

Further, the second game area 116b is provided with a first large winning opening 126 and a second large winning opening 128. The first prize opening 126 and the second prize opening 128 are arranged at positions where only the game balls flowing down the second game area 116b can enter. However, the first special winning opening 126 and the second large winning opening 128 may be arranged so that any game ball flowing down the first game area 116a and the second game area 116b can be entered.

An opening / closing door 126b is provided in the first large winning opening 126 so as to be openable / closable. Normally, the opening / closing door 126b closes the first large winning opening 126 to allow a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 126. The ball is impossible. Specifically, the opening / closing door 126b is in a state of being flush with the board surface of the game board 108 in the closed state, and the game ball flows down in front of the first large winning opening 126. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned big role game is executed, the opening / closing door 126b is opened and functions as a saucer for guiding the game ball to the first big winning opening 126, and the game ball enters the first big winning opening 126. A sphere is possible. Then, when the game ball enters the first prize opening 126, the predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player.

The second prize opening 128 is provided below the first prize opening 126 in the second game area 116b. The second large winning opening 128 includes a movable piece 128b, and the movable piece 128b is normally maintained in a closed state. On the other hand, when the small hit game described later is executed, the movable piece 128b is controlled to be in the open state, and the game ball can enter the second large winning opening 128. In the following, the first large winning opening 126 and the second large winning opening 128 will be collectively referred to as a large winning opening.

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the second large winning opening 128 according to the simultaneous turning reference example. The second game area 116b is provided with a structure 129 that projects toward the front side of the game board 108. The structure 129 is surrounded by four sides and a bottom side located in the left-right direction and the front-back direction of the gaming machine 100, and an opening is formed in the upper portion. The opening formed in the upper part of the structure 129 becomes the second large winning opening 128. A movable piece 128b is provided on the upper part of the structure 129, and normally, as shown in FIG. 3A, the movable piece 128b is maintained in a closed state in which the second special winning opening 128 is closed. ..

The movable piece 128b projects into the game area 116 in which the game ball rolls and flows down so as to face above the game machine 100. Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is maintained in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the game area 116 (second game area 116b) falls onto the movable piece 128b. Here, the bases of the structure 129 are substantially parallel in the horizontal direction, and the right side surface of the gaming machine 100 has a dimensional relationship slightly longer in the height direction than the left side surface. Therefore, in the second prize opening 128, the left side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side, and the movable piece 128b maintained in the closed state is located so that the left side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side. It is inclined to. Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is in the closed state, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 3A, the game ball that has fallen on the movable piece 128b slowly rolls on the movable piece 128b from right to left. It will move.

Then, when the small hit game described later is executed, the movable piece 128b shifts to an open state in which the second large winning opening 128 is opened. Here, as shown in FIG. 3B, the movable piece 128b shifts from the closed state to the open state by sliding toward the back side of the game board 108. As a result, when the state changes from the closed state to the open state, the game ball rolling on the movable piece 128b falls into the second large winning opening 128 by its own weight.

As described above, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the movable piece 128b is slightly tilted to secure a long time for the game ball to roll on the movable piece 128b. Then, by changing the movable piece 128b from the closed state to the open state, the game ball rolling on the movable piece 128b is guided into the second large winning opening 128. With the above configuration, a predetermined number of game balls can be guided into the second large winning opening 128 even if the time for maintaining the movable piece 128b in the open state is slightly set. In other words, the time required to keep the movable piece 128b in the open state, which is required to allow a predetermined number of game balls to enter the second large winning opening 128, can be shortened. A hole communicating with the back side of the game board 108 is formed on the back surface of the structure 129, and the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 128 is discharged to the back side of the game board 108. .. Then, when the game ball enters the second prize opening 128, the predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player.

Although the configuration of the second large winning opening 128 has been described here, the first variable starting port 120B also has the same configuration as the second large winning opening 128. That is, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B projects toward the front side of the game board 108 in the closed state, and the game ball rolls on the movable piece 120b. Then, in the open state of the movable piece 120b, the movable piece 120b slides toward the back side of the game board 108, and the game ball can enter the first variable starting port 120B. However, as shown in FIG. 2, the movable piece 128b has the right side higher than the left side in the front view of the gaming machine 100, whereas the movable piece 120b has the left side on the right side in the front view of the gaming machine 100. It is in a higher position than.

Here, the board surface configuration of the second game area 116b will be described in detail. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, the second starting port 122 and the gate 124 are arranged in parallel at the uppermost portion of the second game area 116b. All the game balls guided to the second game area 116b enter the second starting port 122 or pass through the gate 124 and flow downward. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for each ball entering the second starting port 122.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 122, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a large role game or a small hit game is executed. Further, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the first variable starting port 120B (movable piece 120b).

Directly below the second starting port 122 and the gate 124, the first large winning opening 126 is provided. When the first big winning opening 126 is in the open state, all the game balls that have passed through the gate 124 and flowed downward are arranged so as to enter the first big winning opening 126. In the simultaneous turning reference example, the first large winning opening 126 is opened only in the large role game. That is, it can be said that the first large winning opening 126 is a large winning opening dedicated to the big role game. When a game ball enters the first prize opening 126 during a major role game, two or more predetermined numbers (15 in this case) of the game balls are paid out as prize balls for each ball entered. ..

A first variable starting port 120B is provided below the first winning opening 126. Further, an out port 131 is provided between the first large winning opening 126 and the first variable starting port 120B. The out port 131 is an entrance of a passage for discharging the game ball from the game area 116, and even if the game ball enters the out port 131, the prize ball is not paid out.

In the second game area 116b, nails are arranged so that most of the game balls (for example, 90% or more) that have flowed down below the first prize opening 126 fall onto the movable piece 120b. Further, by these nails, a part (for example, 1% to 10%) of the game balls that have flowed down below the first winning opening 126 is guided to the out opening 131.

In the closed state of the first variable starting port 120B, the game ball rolls on the movable piece 120b. If the movable piece 120b is opened while the game ball is rolling on the movable piece 120b, all the game balls on the movable piece 120b are guided into the first variable starting port 120B. When a game ball enters the first variable starting port 120B, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for each ball entering, and whether or not a large role game or a small hit game is executed is determined. A lottery will be held.

The game ball that has not entered the first variable starting port 120B falls from above the movable piece 120b to the right side when viewed from the front of the game machine 100. A second big winning opening 128 is provided below the first variable starting opening 120B, and most of the game balls that have fallen from the movable piece 120b roll on the movable piece 128b of the second big winning opening 128. do. The game ball on the movable piece 128b slowly rolls from the right side to the left side in the front view of the game machine 100 due to the inclination of the movable piece 128b.

Although details will be described later, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the second large winning opening 128 is opened only in the small hit game. That is, it can be said that the second large winning opening 128 is a large winning opening dedicated to small hit games. If the movable piece 128b is opened while the game ball is rolling on the movable piece 128b, all the game balls on the movable piece 128b are guided into the second large winning opening 128. When a game ball enters the second large winning opening 128 during a small hit game, two or more predetermined number of game balls (15 in this case) are paid out as prize balls for each ball entered. Is done.

At the lower left of the second large winning opening 128, a normal drawing operating opening 125 is provided. Here, nails are arranged in the second game area 116b so that almost all the game balls that have fallen downward from the second large winning opening 128 enter the normal drawing operating port 125. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, the normal drawing operating port 125 constitutes a "specific winning opening" in which one game ball is paid out as a prize ball for each entering ball of the game ball. Further, when the game ball enters the normal drawing operating port 125, it is determined whether or not to open the first variable starting port 120B (movable piece 120b) in the same manner as when the game ball passes through the gate 124. A lottery will be held.

At the bottom of the game area 116, a game ball that did not enter any of the general winning opening 118, the first starting opening 120, the second starting opening 122, the normal drawing operating opening 125, and the large winning opening. Is provided on the back side of the game board 108 from the game area 116.

The gaming machine 100 is controlled by an effect display device 200 composed of a liquid crystal display device, an effect accessory device 202 composed of a movable device, and various lighting modes and emission colors as an effect device for producing an effect while the game is in progress. An effect lighting device 204 composed of a lamp, an audio output device 206 composed of a speaker, and an effect operation device 208 that receives an operation of a player are provided.

The effect display device 200 includes a main effect display unit 200a including an image display unit for displaying an image, and the main effect display unit 200a is visually recognized from the front side of the game machine 100 at a substantially central portion of the game board 108. Arranged as possible. As shown in the figure, the main effect display unit 200a is subjected to various effects such as variable display of the three effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c.

The effect accessory device 202 is arranged in front of the main effect display unit 200a, and is normally retracted in a state of being divided into a plurality of constituent members at the origin position on the back side of the game board 108, so that the player can evacuate. It is not visible. Then, when each component moves to a movable position on the front surface of the main effect display unit 200a by driving the actuator during the variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c, the front surface of the main effect display unit 200a. Each component is united to give the player a sense of expectation of a big hit.

The effect lighting device 204 is provided on the effect accessory device 202, the game board 108, and the like, and is variously controlled to be lit according to an image or the like displayed on the main effect display unit 200a.

The audio output device 206 is provided at the upper position of the front frame 106 and the lowermost position of the outer frame 102, and is variously directed toward the front side of the gaming machine 100 according to an image or the like displayed on the main effect display unit 200a. Output audio.

The effect operation device 208 is composed of buttons that receive a player's pressing operation, is provided at a substantially central position in the width direction of the game machine 100, and is provided at a position below the transmission plate 110. The effect operation device 208 is activated according to an image or the like displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, and when the player's operation is received within the operation effective time, various operations are performed according to the operation. The production is executed.

Reference numeral 132 in the figure is an upper plate on which a prize ball paid out from the game machine 100 and a game ball rented from the game ball lending device are guided. It will be guided to the lower plate 134. Further, on the bottom surface of the lower plate 134, a ball extraction hole (not shown) for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 134 is formed. This ball pulling hole is normally closed by an opening / closing plate (not shown), but by pressing the ball pulling knob 134a, the opening / closing plate slides integrally with the ball pulling knob 134a, and the ball pulling hole It is possible to discharge the game ball below the lower plate 134.

Further, on the game board 108, the first special symbol display 160, the second special symbol display 162, and the first special symbol are held at a position outside the game area 116 and visible to the player. A display 164, a second special symbol hold display 166, a normal symbol display 168, a normal symbol hold display 170, and a right-handed notification display 172 are provided. Each of these indicators 160 to 172 is a device for displaying various situations related to the game, and the details thereof will be described later.

(Internal configuration of control means)
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a control means for controlling the progress of the game according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

The main control board 300 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 300a, a main ROM 300b, and a main RAM 300c. Based on the input signals from each detection switch and timer, the main CPU 300a reads the program stored in the main ROM 300b and performs arithmetic processing, directly controls each device and display, or produces the result of arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly. The main RAM 300c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 300a.

The main control board 300 has a general winning opening detection switch 118s for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning opening 118, and a first fixed device for detecting that a game ball has entered the first fixed starting port 120A. A second variable start port detection switch 120Bs, which detects that a game ball has entered the first variable start port 120B, and a second variable start port detection switch 120Bs, which detects that a game ball has entered the second start port 122. Start port detection switch 122s, gate detection switch 124s for detecting that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, normal figure operation port detection switch 125s for detecting that the game ball has entered the normal figure operation port 125, first large The first large winning opening detection switch 126s that detects that a game ball has entered the winning opening 126 and the second large winning opening detection switch 128s that detects that a game ball has entered the second large winning opening 128 are connected. A detection signal is input to the main control board 300 from each of these detection switches.

Further, on the main control board 300, a normal electric accessory solenoid 120c that operates the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B and a first large winning opening that operates the opening / closing door 126b that opens and closes the first large winning opening 126 The solenoid 126c and the second large winning opening solenoid 128c that operates the movable piece 128b that opens and closes the second large winning opening 128 are connected, and the first variable starting port 120B and the first large are connected by the main control board 300. The opening and closing control of the winning opening 126 and the second major winning opening 128 is performed.

Further, the main control board 300 includes a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol hold indicator 164, a second special symbol hold indicator 166, a normal symbol display 168, and a normal symbol display. The symbol hold indicator 170 and the right-handed notification indicator 172 are connected, and the display control of each of these indicators is performed by the main control board 300.

Further, a setting change switch 180s is provided on the back surface of the game board 108. The setting change switch 180s is configured to be accessible by a dedicated key. The operation of changing and confirming the set value is possible on condition that the setting change switch 180s is turned on. As will be described in detail later, in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous rotation reference example, one of the six levels of set values having different degrees of advantage is stored as a registered set value in the set value buffer, and according to the stored registered set value. The game progresses. Here, the set value is set in 6 stages, but the set value may be provided in only 2 stages of high setting and low setting, or may be provided in other plurality of stages. Furthermore, the set value is not essential and the degree of advantage does not have to be changed.

Further, a RAM clear button is provided on the back surface of the game board 108 so that it can be pressed, and the operation of pressing the RAM clear button is detected by the RAM clear switch 182s. The RAM clear switch 182s is connected to the main control board 300, and a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s to the main control board 300. When the RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s when the power is turned on, the main CPU 300a clears the main RAM 300c.

A performance display monitor 184 is provided on the back surface of the game board 108. The main control board 300 displays the registered set value and the base ratio on the performance display monitor 184.

Further, the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous turning reference example mainly includes a special game started by entering the gaming ball into the first starting port 120 or the second starting opening 122, and the passing of the gaming ball through the gate 124, or , It is roughly divided into a normal game started by entering a game ball into the normal drawing operation port 125. The main ROM 300b of the main control board 300 stores various programs for advancing special games and normal games, as well as data and tables required for various games.

Further, the payout control board 310 and the sub control board 330 are connected to the main control board 300. The payout control board 310 controls for firing the game ball and controls for paying out the prize ball. The payout control board 310 also includes a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate in both directions. A game information output terminal board 312 is connected to the payout control board 310, and various information on the game progress output from the main control board 300 is transmitted via the payout control board 310 and the game information output terminal board 312. , Will be output to the hall computer of the amusement store.

Further, a payout motor 314 for paying out the game balls stored in the storage unit to the player as prize balls is connected to the payout control board 310. The payout control board 310 controls the payout motor 314 based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 300 to control the player to pay out a predetermined prize ball. At this time, the number of game balls paid out is detected by the payout ball counting switch 316s, and it is possible to grasp whether the prize balls to be paid out have been paid out to the player.

Further, a plate full tank detection switch 318s for detecting the full tank state of the lower plate 134 is connected to the payout control board 310. The plate full tank detection switch 318s is provided in a passage leading the game ball to be paid out as a prize ball to the lower plate 134, and the game ball detection signal is input to the payout control board 310.

Then, when a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 134 and the tank is full, the game balls stay in the passage toward the lower plate 134, and the plate full tank detection switch 318s is directed toward the payout control board 310. , The game ball detection signal is continuously input. When the game ball detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined time, the payout control board 310 determines that the lower plate 134 is in a full tank state, and transmits a plate full tank command to the main control board 300. On the other hand, if the continuous input of the game ball detection signal is interrupted after the dish full tank command is transmitted, it is determined that the dish full tank state has been released, and the dish full tank release command is transmitted to the main control board 300.

Further, the payout control board 310 is provided with a launch control circuit 320 that controls launch of the game ball. The payout control board 310 is provided with an operation handle 112, and a touch sensor 112s for detecting that the player touches the operation handle 112 and an operation volume 112a for detecting the operation angle of the operation handle 112 are connected to each other. ing. Then, when a signal is input from the touch sensor 112s and the operation volume 112a, the launch control circuit 320 controls to energize the launch solenoid 112c provided in the game ball launcher to launch the game ball.

The sub-control board 330 mainly controls each effect such as during a game or during standby. The sub control board 330 includes a sub CPU 330a, a sub ROM 330b, and a sub RAM 330c, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be communicable from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 330 in one direction. .. The sub CPU 330a reads the program stored in the sub ROM 330b, performs arithmetic processing, and executes and controls the effect based on the command transmitted from the main control board 300, the input signal from the timer, and the like. At this time, the sub RAM 330c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 330a.

Specifically, in the sub control board 330, the sub CPU 330a, the sub ROM 330b, and the sub RAM 330c cooperate to function as a sub main, an image control unit, an accessory control unit, a lighting control unit, and a voice control unit. The sub-main determines the content of the effect to be executed and manages and supervises the execution of the effect according to various input commands. The image control unit performs image display control for displaying an image on the main effect display unit 200a. The sub ROM 330b stores a large amount of image data such as patterns, backgrounds, and subtitles displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, and the image control unit reads the image data from the sub ROM 330b into a VRAM (not shown) and mains the image data. Controls the image display of the effect display unit 200a.

Further, the accessory control unit drives the actuator according to the management of the effect by the sub-main, and movably controls the effect device 202. The lighting control unit controls the lighting of the effect lighting device 204. In addition, the voice control unit performs voice output control for outputting voice from the voice output device 206. A large amount of audio data such as audio and music output from the audio output device 206 is stored in the sub ROM 330b, and the audio control unit reads the audio data from the sub ROM 330b and controls the audio output of the audio output device 206. do.

Further, the sub-control board 330 executes a predetermined effect when an operation detection signal is input from the effect operation device detection switch 208s that detects that the effect operation device 208 has been pressed or rotated.

A power supply board (not shown) is connected to each board, and power is supplied to each board from a commercial power source via the power supply board. Further, the power supply board is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor.

FIG. 5 is an address map of a memory area used by the main CPU 300a according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. In FIG. 5, the address is shown in hexadecimal, and "H" is shown in hexadecimal. As shown in FIG. 5, the memory area used by the main CPU 300a includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the main ROM 300b and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the main RAM 300c.

The memory area of the main ROM 300b is a used area (0000H to 1BF3H) for storing a program and data for controlling the progress of the game, and an area other than the used area, and is a process for performing a test specified by the game machine rules. An unused area (2000H to 2BFFF) for storing a program and data for executing a process for displaying the performance display monitor 184 (including a process for calculating the base ratio displayed on the performance display monitor 184). And are provided.

The used area of the main ROM 300b includes a program area (0000H to 0A89H) in which a program for controlling the progress of the game is stored, an unused area (0A8AH to 11FFH), and a data area (1200H) in which data other than the program is stored. ~ 1BF3H) is provided. The used area may not include an unused area (0A8AH to 0FFFH).

The non-use area of the main ROM 300b is a program area (2000H to 27FFH) in which a program for executing a process for performing a test specified by the game machine rules and a process for displaying the performance display monitor 184 is stored. A data area (2800H to 2BFFH) for storing data other than these programs is provided.

In addition to the used area and the unused area, the memory area of the main ROM 300b is a ROM comment area (1E00H to 1EFFH) in which arbitrary data such as an unused area (1A7BH to 1DFFH), a program title, and a version are stored. ), An unused area (1F00H to 1FFFH), an unused area (2C00H to 2FBFH), and a program management area (2FC0H to 2FFFH) in which information necessary for the main CPU 300a to execute a program is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 300c is a used area (F000H to F1FFH) temporarily used when a program for controlling the progress of the game is executed, and an area other than the used area, according to the rules of the gaming machine. An unused area (F210H to F228H) that is temporarily used when a program for performing a predetermined test or a process for displaying the performance display monitor 184 is executed is provided.

The used area of the main RAM 300c includes a work area (F000H to F12AH) temporarily used when a program for controlling the progress of the game is executed, an unused area (F12BH to F1D7H), and the progress of the game. A stack area (F1D8H to F1FFH) for temporarily saving data during execution of a control program is provided. The used area may not include an unused area (F12BH to F1D7H).

In the non-use area of the main RAM 300c, a work area (F210H) temporarily used when a processing program for performing a test specified by the game machine rules and a processing program for displaying the performance display monitor 184 is being executed. ~ F21FH), and stack areas (F220H to F228H) for temporarily saving data when these programs are being executed are provided.

Further, in the memory area of the main RAM 300c, an unused area (F200H to F20FH) and an unused area (F229H to F3FFH) are provided in addition to the used area and the unused area.

As described above, in the main ROM 300b and the main RAM 300c, the used area used for controlling the progress of the game, the process for performing the test specified by the game machine rules, and the process for controlling the display of the performance display monitor 184. It is provided separately from the unused area used to execute.

In the main RAM 300c, a 16-byte unused area (F200H to F20FH) is provided between the used area and the unused area. The unused areas (F200H to F20FH) are set as boundary areas that separate the used area and the unused area, and the boundary between the used area and the unused area is clarified, and a program for controlling the progress of the game is provided. When the unused area is used during execution, and when the program for performing the test specified by the game machine rules and the processing for controlling the display of the performance display monitor 184 is being executed. It prevents the used area from being used.

The unused area provided between the used area and the unused area may be at least 1 byte or more, preferably 4 bytes or more from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, and is set to 16 bytes or more. Is more desirable. Further, although the unused area is prohibited from writing and reading data, it may be cleared at a predetermined timing from the viewpoint of preventing fraud.

Further, input / output units are assigned to the memory spaces of FE00h to FEFFh. Such an input / output unit will be described in detail later.

Next, the game in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous rotation reference example will be described together with various tables stored in the main ROM 300b.

As described above, in the gaming machine 100 of the simultaneous rotation reference example, two types of games, a special game and a normal game, proceed in parallel. In the special game, the game progresses in one of the low-probability game state and the high-probability game state, and the normal game is in any of the non-short-time game state, the medium-time short-time game state, and the short-time game state. The game progresses.

The details of each game state will be described later, but the low-probability game state is a game state in which the probability of acquiring the right to execute a big role game in which the big winning opening is opened is set low, and is called a high-probability game state. Is a game state in which the probability of acquiring the right to perform a major role game is set high. Further, the non-time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 120b is difficult to open and the game ball is difficult to enter into the first variable starting port 120B, and the medium-time-time-saving game state is a non-time-saving game. This is a gaming state in which the movable piece 120b is more likely to be opened than in the state, and the gaming ball is more likely to enter the first variable starting port 120B. Further, the reduced working hours state is a gaming state in which the movable piece 120b is more likely to be opened and the gaming ball is most likely to enter the first variable starting port 120B than in the medium and short working hours gaming state. In the time-saving game state, when the game balls are continuously fired toward the second game area 116b during the game, the game balls are set to decrease slightly or hardly decrease. ..

As described above, since the special game and the normal game proceed in parallel at the same time, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the low-probability game state or the high-probability game state, the non-short-time game state, the medium-time short-time game state, and the short-time game It becomes a gaming state in which any of the states is combined. In the following, for ease of understanding, the gaming state related to the special game, that is, the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are referred to as the special gaming state, and the gaming state related to the normal game, that is, the non-time-saving gaming state, medium. The time-saving game state and the time-saving game state may be referred to as a normal game state. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is set to a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state.

When the player operates the operation handle 112 to launch the game ball into the game area 116 and the game ball flowing down the game area 116 enters the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, the player is allowed to play the game. A lottery for whether or not to give a profit (hereinafter referred to as a "major role lottery") is held. In this big role lottery, if a big hit is won, a big role game is executed in which the big winning opening is opened and a game ball can be entered into the big winning opening, and the game state after the end of the big winning game. Is set to any of the above gaming states. In the following, the major role lottery method will be described.

As will be described in detail later, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, various random numbers related to the big winning combination lottery (big hit determination random number, winning symbol random number, reach group determination random number, reach). The mode determination random number and the fluctuation pattern random number) are acquired, and each of these random number values is stored in the special figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c. In the following, various random numbers stored in the special figure hold storage area when the game ball enters the first start port 120 are collectively referred to as special 1 hold, and the game ball enters the second start port 122. The various random numbers stored in the special figure hold storage area are collectively called special 2 hold.

The special figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c includes a first special figure reservation storage area and a second special figure reservation storage area. The first special figure reserved storage area and the second special figure reserved storage area each have four storage units (first to fourth storage units). Then, when the game ball enters the first start port 120, the special 1 hold is stored in order from the first storage unit of the first special figure hold storage area, and when the game ball enters the second start port 122, the special 1 hold is stored. 2 Holds are stored in order from the first storage unit of the second special figure hold storage area.

For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120, if the hold is not stored in any of the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure hold storage area, the first storage unit is used. Special 1 Hold is memorized. Further, for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120 in a state where the special 1 hold is stored in the first storage unit to the third storage unit, the special 1 hold is set to the fourth storage unit. Remember. Further, even when the game ball enters the second starting port 122, the special 2 hold is stored in the 1st to 4th storage units of the 2nd special figure hold storage area in the same manner as described above. Special 2 hold is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number (ordinal number).

However, the number of special 1 hold (X1) and the number of special 2 hold (X2) that can be stored in the first special figure hold storage area and the second special figure hold storage area are set to four, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the game ball enters the first starting port 120, if four special 1 holdings are already stored in the first special figure holding storage area, the first starting port 120 is entered. No new special 1 hold is memorized by entering the game ball. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second starting port 122, if four special 2 holdings are already stored in the second special figure holding storage area, the game to the second starting port 122 is played. No new special 2 hold is memorized by entering the ball.

FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a low probability jackpot determination random number determination table according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one jackpot determination random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 65535. Then, when the big win lottery is started, that is, the big hit determination random number determination table is selected according to the game state when the big hit is determined, and the selected jackpot determination random number determination table and the acquired jackpot determination random number are used. A big role lottery will be held.

In the low-probability gaming state, when starting the big win lottery for the special 1 hold and the special 2 hold, the low probability big hit determination random number determination table is referred to. Here, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, six levels of set values having different degrees of advantage are provided, and a low probability jackpot determination random number determination table is provided for each set value. During the game, the set value is set to one of the six stages, and the low probability jackpot determination random number judgment corresponding to the currently set set value (registered set value stored in the set value buffer) A big role lottery is held with reference to the table.

In the low-probability gaming state, when the set value = 1 (registered set value = 1), the big win lottery is performed with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. 6 (a). Is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10218, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 8996, it is determined to be a small hit, and others. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is judged as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1 / 300.6, and the small hit probability is about 1 / 3.45.

In the low-probability gaming state, when the set value = 2 (registered set value = 2), the big win lottery is performed with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table b shown in FIG. 6 (b). Is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table b, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10225, it is determined to be a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 8996, it is determined to be a small hit, and others. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is judged as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1 / 291.2, and the small hit probability is about 1 / 3.45.

When the game is in a low-probability game state and the set value is set to 3 (registered set value = 3), a large winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table c shown in FIG. 6 (c). Is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table c, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10232, it is determined to be a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 8996, it is determined to be a small hit, and others. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is judged as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1 / 282.4, and the small hit probability is about 1 / 3.45.

When the game is in a low-probability game state and the set value is set to 4 (registered set value = 4), a large winning combination lottery is made with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table d shown in FIG. 6 (d). Is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table d, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10239, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 8996, it is determined to be a small hit, and others. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is judged as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1 / 274.2, and the small hit probability is about 1 / 3.45.

When the game is in a low-probability game state and the set value is set to 5 (registered set value = 5), a large winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table e shown in FIG. 6 (e). Is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table e, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10246, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 8996, it is determined to be a small hit, and others. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is judged as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1 / 266.4, and the small hit probability is about 1 / 3.45.

When the game is in a low-probability game state and the set value is set to 6 (registered set value = 6), a large winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination random number determination table f shown in FIG. 6 (f). Is done. According to this low probability jackpot determination random number determination table f, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10253, it is determined to be a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 8996, it is determined to be a small hit, and others. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is judged as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1 / 259.0, and the small hit probability is about 1 / 3.45.

FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a high-accuracy jackpot determination random number determination table according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation. In the high-probability gaming state, when starting the big win lottery for the special 1 hold and the special 2 hold, the big hit determination random number determination table at the time of high probability is referred to. The high-accuracy jackpot decision random number determination table is also provided for each set value in the same manner as the low-accuracy jackpot determination random number determination table.

When the game is in a high-probability game state and the set value is set to 1 (registered set value = 1), a large winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the high-probability jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. 7 (a). Is done. According to this high-accuracy jackpot determination random number determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10620, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 8996, it is determined to be a small hit, and others. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is judged as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1 / 105.7, and the small hit probability is about 1 / 3.45.

Similarly, in the high-probability gaming state and the set value = 2 to 6 (registered set value = 2 to 6), the high-probability jackpot shown in FIGS. 7 (b) to 7 (f) A large winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the determined random number determination tables b to f. According to these high-accuracy jackpot-determined random number determination tables b to f, when the jackpot-determined random numbers are the values shown in the figures, it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, when the set value = 2 to 6, the jackpot probability is about 1 / 102.4 to 1 / 91.0, and the small hit probability is about 1 / 3.45.

As described above, the big role lottery is performed according to the registered set value. At this time, the winning probability of the jackpot differs depending on the registered set value, and it is easier to win the jackpot when the registered set value is large than when it is small. Here, it is assumed that the winning probability of the small hit does not change even if the registered setting value is different, but the winning probability of the small hit may be different for each registered setting value. In addition, the small hit is not essential, and only one of the big hit and the loss may be decided in the big win lottery.

Further, here, the winning probability of the jackpot in both the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state is different depending on the registered set value, but the jackpot in either the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state is different. Only the winning probability of is different depending on the registration setting value.

FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a hit symbol random number determination table and a small hit symbol random number determination table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one winning symbol random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the determination result of "big hit" is derived by the above-mentioned big role lottery, the type of the special symbol is determined by the acquired winning symbol random number and the winning symbol random number determination table. At this time, if the "big hit" is won by the special 1 hold, the symbol random number determination table a for the special 1 is selected as shown in FIG. 8 (a), and the "big hit" is won by the special 2 hold. In that case, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), when the special 2 hit symbol random number determination table b is selected and the "small hit" is won by the special 1 hold, as shown in FIG. 8 (c). When the special 1 small hit symbol random number determination table a is selected and the special 2 hold wins the "small hit", as shown in FIG. 8 (d), the special 2 small hit symbol random number determination table b is selected. In the following, the special symbol determined by the hit symbol random number, that is, the special symbol determined when the jackpot determination result is obtained is referred to as a jackpot symbol, and is determined when the small hit determination result is obtained. A special symbol is called a small hit symbol, and a special symbol determined when a loss determination result is obtained is called a lost symbol.

According to the special 1 hit symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 8 (a) and the special 2 per symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 8 (b), according to the acquired value of the winning symbol random number, As shown in the figure, a jackpot symbol (special symbols A to J) is determined as a special symbol. Further, according to the special 1 small hit symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 8 (c) and the special 2 small hit symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 8 (d), the acquired value of the winning symbol random number. As shown in the figure, small hit symbols (special symbols Z1 to Z6) are determined as special symbols.

If the result of the big role lottery is "missing" and the lottery result is derived by holding special 1, the special symbol X is determined as the losing symbol without performing the lottery, and the lottery result is special 2. When it is derived by holding, the special symbol Y is determined as the lost symbol without performing a lottery. That is, the winning symbol random number determination table is referred only when the big winning lottery result is "big hit", and is not referred to when the big winning lottery result is "missing" or "small hit". Further, the small hit symbol random number determination table is referred to only when the large winning combination lottery result is "small hit", and is not referred to when the large winning combination lottery result is "big hit" or "missing". The special symbols Z1 to Z6, which are small hit symbols, are also collectively referred to as a special symbol Z.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the reach group determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. A plurality of reach group determination random number determination tables are provided, and preset tables are selected according to the hold type, the number of holds, the game state, and the like. When the game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one reach group determination random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 10066. As described above, when the major winning combination lottery result is derived, a process of determining a variable effect pattern for notifying the major winning combination lottery result is performed. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, when the result of the large winning combination lottery is "missing", the group type is first determined by the reach group determination random number and the reach group determination random number determination table in determining the variation effect pattern.

For example, when the game state is set to the normal state, which will be described in detail later, and the big role lottery result of "loss" is derived based on the special 1 hold, the special 1 hold is held when the big role lottery is performed. If the number (hereinafter, simply referred to as “holding number”) is 0, the reach group determination random number determination table 1 is selected as shown in FIG. 9A. Similarly, when the result of the big win lottery of "Loss" is derived based on the special 1 hold when it is set to the normal state, if the number of holds when performing the big win lottery is 1 or 2. As shown in FIG. 9B, the reach group determination random number determination table 2 is selected, and if the number of reservations is 3, the reach group determination random number determination table 3 is selected as shown in FIG. 9C. NS. In FIG. 9, the group x described in the group type column indicates an arbitrary group number. Therefore, various group numbers are determined as the group type according to the acquired reach group determination random number and the type of the reach group determination random number determination table to be referred to.

In addition, although the reach group determination random number determination table referred to when the major role lottery result of "loss" is derived based on the special 1 hold in the normal state has been described here, the main ROM 300b has other than this. Also stores a large number of reach group determination random number determination tables.

If the result of the big win lottery is "big hit" or "small hit", the group type is not decided when the variable effect pattern is decided. That is, the reach group determination random number determination table is referred only when the big win lottery result is "missing", and is not referred to when the big win lottery result is "big hit" or "small hit".

FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a reach mode determination random number determination table according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation. This reach mode determination random number judgment table is selected when the big role lottery result is "miss", and the reach mode determination random number judgment table at the time of loss, and the big hit selected when the big role lottery result is "big hit". It is roughly divided into a time reach mode determination random number determination table and a small hit time reach mode determination random number determination table selected when the result of the big win lottery is "small hit". The reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of loss is provided for each group type determined as described above, and the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of big hit and the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of small hit are in the gaming state. , It is provided for each hold type.

In addition, each reach mode determination random number determination table is also provided for each game state and symbol type. Here, FIG. 10A shows an example of the reach mode determination random number determination table for group x referred to in a predetermined game state and symbol type, and an example of the reach mode determination random number determination table for special 1 jackpot. FIG. 10 (b) shows an example of the special 1 jackpot reach mode determination random number determination table, and FIG. 10 (c) shows an example of the special 1 small hit reach mode determination random number determination table. An example of the reach mode determination random number determination table for special 2 is shown in FIG. 10 (e).

When the game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one reach mode determination random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 250. Then, when the result of the above-mentioned major role lottery is "missing", as shown in FIG. 10A, a random number for determining the reach mode at the time of losing corresponding to the group type determined by the above-mentioned group type lottery. The determination table is selected, and the variable mode number is determined based on the selected random number for determining the reach mode at the time of loss and the random number for determining the reach mode. In addition, when the result of the above-mentioned big win lottery is "big hit", as shown in FIGS. 10 (b) and 10 (c), it corresponds to the game state at the time of winning the big hit and the read hold type. The jackpot reach mode determination random number determination table is selected, and the variable mode number is determined based on the selected jackpot reach mode determination random number determination table and the reach mode determination random number.

Further, when the result of the above-mentioned large winning combination lottery is "small hit", as shown in FIGS. 10 (d) and 10 (e), the game state at the time of winning the small hit and the read hold type. The small hit reach mode determination random number determination table corresponding to is selected, and the variable mode number is determined based on the selected small hit reach mode determination random number determination table and the reach mode determination random number.

Further, in each reach mode determination random number determination table, the reach mode determination random number is associated with the variation pattern random number determination table described later together with the variation mode number, and at the same time when the variation mode number is determined, the variation pattern The random number judgment table is determined. In FIG. 10, the table x described in the column of the variation pattern random number determination table indicates an arbitrary table number. Therefore, the variation mode number and the table number of the variation pattern random number determination table are determined according to the acquired reach group determination random number and the type of the reach mode determination random number determination table to be referred to. Further, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the fluctuation mode number and the fluctuation pattern number described later are set in hexadecimal. In the following, when a hexadecimal number is indicated, "H" is added, but what is described as XXH in FIGS. 10 to 12 indicates an arbitrary value indicated by the hexadecimal number.

As described above, when the result of the large winning combination lottery is "missing", first, the group type is determined by the reach group determination random number determination table and the reach group determination random number shown in FIG. Then, the variation mode number and the variation pattern random number determination table are determined by the reach mode determination random number determination table and the reach mode determination random number at the time of loss shown in FIG. 10A according to the determined group type and game state.

On the other hand, if the result of the big win lottery is "big hit" or "small hit", the determined big hit symbol or small hit symbol (type of special symbol), big hit, or game state at the time of small hit winning, etc. The variation mode number and the variation pattern random number determination table are determined by referring to the corresponding jackpot reach mode determination random number determination table shown in FIG. 10 and using the reach mode determination random number.

FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern random number determination table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. Here, the variation pattern random number determination table x of a predetermined table number x is shown, but in addition to this, a large number of variation pattern random number determination tables are provided for each table number.

When the game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one variation pattern random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 238. Then, the variation pattern number is determined as shown in the figure based on the variation pattern random number determination table determined at the same time as the variation mode number and the acquired variation pattern random number.

When the big winning combination lottery is performed in this way, the variable mode number and the variable pattern number are determined according to the big winning combination lottery result, the determined symbol type, the game state, the number of holdings, the holding type, and the like. These variation mode numbers and variation pattern numbers specify the variation effect pattern, and the mode and time of the variation effect are associated with each of them.

FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a fluctuation time determination table according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation. As described above, when the variation mode number is determined, the variation time 1 is determined according to the variation time 1 determination table shown in FIG. 12 (a). According to this variation time 1 determination table, the variation time 1 is associated with each variation mode number, and the corresponding variation time 1 is determined according to the determined variation mode number.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern number is determined as described above, the fluctuation time 2 is determined according to the fluctuation time 2 determination table shown in FIG. 12 (b). According to the fluctuation time 2 determination table, the fluctuation time 2 is associated with each fluctuation pattern number, and the corresponding fluctuation time 2 is determined according to the determined fluctuation pattern number. The total time of the fluctuation times 1 and 2 determined in this way is the time of the fluctuation effect for notifying the result of the big winning combination lottery, that is, the fluctuation time. This fluctuation time is the time until the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162.

As will be described in detail later, when the special symbol is determined based on the special 1 hold and the variation mode number and the variation pattern number, that is, the variation time are determined, the first special symbol is displayed over the determined variation time. The fluctuation display of the symbol is performed on the device 160, and when the fluctuation time elapses, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160. Further, when the special symbol is determined based on the special 2 hold and the fluctuation pattern number, that is, the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation display of the symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 162 over the determined fluctuation time. When the fluctuation time elapses, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162. At this time, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160, so that the lost symbol is confirmed as a result of the major role lottery, the major role lottery based on the next special 1 hold becomes feasible, and the lost symbol is the second. By stopping and displaying on the special symbol display 162, the loss is confirmed as a result of the big winning combination lottery, and the big winning combination lottery based on the next special 2 hold becomes feasible. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, the jackpot is confirmed as a result of the big win lottery, the big win game is executed, and the small hit symbol is the first special. When the symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 is stopped and displayed, the small hit is confirmed as a result of the big winning combination lottery, and the small hit game is executed.

In this way, the fluctuation time defines the time for displaying the fluctuation of the symbol on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, in other words, the time until the result of the big role lottery is confirmed. Become.

When the variation mode number is determined as described above, the variation mode command corresponding to the determined variation mode number is transmitted to the sub-control board 330, and when the variation pattern number is determined, the determined variation The variation pattern command corresponding to the pattern number is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. In the sub-control board 330, the first half mode of the variation effect is mainly determined based on the received variation mode command, and the second half aspect of the variation effect is mainly determined based on the received variation pattern command. However, the details will be described later. In the following, the fluctuation mode number and the fluctuation pattern number may be collectively referred to as fluctuation information, and the fluctuation mode command and the fluctuation pattern command may be collectively referred to as a fluctuation command.

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the gaming state and the fluctuation time according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. As described above, the special gaming state and the normal gaming state are combined to form one gaming state, and the progress of the game is controlled according to the game state being set. As described above, there are two types of special gaming states, a low-probability gaming state and a high-probability gaming state, in which the winning probabilities of big hits are different. In addition, there are three types of normal game states: a non-time-saving game state, a medium-time-short game state, and a time-short-time game state in which the ease of entering the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B (ball entry frequency) is different from each other. Has been done.

Here, in a normal game, the ease of entering the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B is determined by three factors: winning probability, fluctuation time, and opening time. As will be described in detail later, in a normal game, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 or the game ball enters the normal drawing operating port 125, the normal drawing hold is stored. Then, a general drawing lottery is performed to determine whether or not to release the movable piece 120b based on the stored general drawing reservation. The result of this general drawing lottery is confirmed when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. When the winning is confirmed as a result of the regular drawing lottery, the movable piece 120b is released. At this time, the winning probability in the general drawing lottery, the fluctuation time, and the opening time when opening the movable piece 120b are set for each normal game state.

In the simultaneous rotation reference example, as shown in FIG. 13A, six types of gaming states are provided depending on the combination of the special gaming state and the normal gaming state. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state. In the non-time saving game state, the winning probability in the normal drawing lottery is low, the fluctuation time is long, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is short. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, the gaming state in which the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state are combined is called a normal state.

Further, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the high-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state may be set, and the gaming state in which both of them are combined is called the most dominant state. In addition, this most dominant state has the highest degree of advantage among the six game states, and if the game balls are properly fired, the game balls gradually increase during the game even if the jackpot is not won. It is set to go.

Further, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, it may be set to a low-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state. In the time-saving game state, the winning probability in the regular drawing lottery is high, the fluctuation time is short, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is long. In the following, a gaming state in which a low-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state are combined is referred to as a low-probability time-saving state.

Further, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state may be set. Hereinafter, the gaming state in which the high-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are combined is referred to as a high-probability time-saving state or a high-probability precursor state. The high-accuracy time-saving state and the high-accuracy precursor state will be described in detail later.

Further, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, it may be set to a high-probability gaming state and a medium-time short-time gaming state. In the medium-time short-time game state, the winning probability in the normal drawing lottery is higher than in the non-time-short-time game state and lower than in the non-time-time game state, the fluctuation time is short, and the opening time of the movable piece 120b is long. This gaming state can be set when an unexpected situation occurs, such as when the gaming ball is not properly launched. In the following, a gaming state in which a high-probability gaming state and a medium-time short-time gaming state are combined is referred to as a penalty state.

In the sub control board 330, an effect mode corresponding to the gaming state set in the main control board 300 is set. The effect mode defines a background image, BGM, etc. displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, and the content of the effect is different for each effect mode. That is, the player can identify the current gaming state by the effect mode.

As described above, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, six game states are provided. Then, as described above, the variation mode number and the variation pattern number, that is, the variation time are determined according to the game state, the hold type, the number of fluctuations in the game state, and the type of the symbol when the big winning combination lottery is performed. NS.

Here, in the gaming machine 100, a substantial fluctuation target is set for each gaming state. The substantive change target originally indicates the type of hold for which the major role lottery should be performed, and either the special 1 hold or the special 2 hold is set as the real change target for each game state. In the normal state, the special 1 hold is set as the target of substantial fluctuation. Further, in the normal state, since the normal game state is the non-time saving game state, the first variable start port 120B is hardly opened. Therefore, in the normal state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the first game area 116a in order to allow the game ball to enter the first fixed start port 120A.

In the normal state, the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold which is the actual fluctuation target, and when the lost symbol or the small hit symbol is determined, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 3 to 100 seconds. Further, in the normal state, when the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold and the big hit symbol is decided, the fluctuation time is decided within the range of 40 to 100 seconds.

On the other hand, in the normal state, when the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 2 hold which is not the target of the actual fluctuation, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 10 minutes regardless of the determined symbol type. In this way, by setting the fluctuation time to a long time such as 10 minutes, in the normal state, even if the player puts the game ball into the second starting port 122, the big role lottery based on the special 2 hold There are very few execution opportunities.

Specifically, the second starting port 122 is provided in the second game area 116b, and the second starting port 122 is composed of a fixed starting port to which a game ball can always enter. Further, due to the playability of the gaming machine 100, the second starting port 122 is arranged at a position where the gaming ball enters more easily than the first starting port 120. Therefore, if the fluctuation time related to the special 2 hold is set to a short time in the normal state, the player is given an opportunity of a large role lottery more than necessary. Therefore, the fluctuation time is set to a long time such as 10 minutes in order to appropriately launch the game ball toward the first game area 116a in accordance with the original game playability in the normal state.

In the most dominant state, Special 2 Hold is set as a target for substantial fluctuation. Therefore, in the most dominant state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 122. In the most dominant state, when the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold that is not the target of the actual fluctuation, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 10 seconds regardless of the determined symbol type. It should be noted that the case where the big role lottery is performed by the special 1 hold which is not the actual change target in the most dominant state is more playable than the case where the big role lottery is performed by the special 2 hold which is not the real change target in the normal state. The effect is small. Therefore, in the most dominant state, the fluctuation time when the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold, which is not the target of the actual fluctuation, is set as short as 10 seconds.

In the most dominant state, the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 2 hold which is the actual fluctuation target, and when the lost symbol or the small hit symbol is determined, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 1 second to 3 seconds. In addition, in the most dominant state, when the big winning combination lottery is performed by holding the special 2 and the big hit symbol is decided, the fluctuation time is decided within the range of 3 seconds to 10 seconds.

In both the low-probability time-saving state and the high-probability time-saving state, the special 1 hold is set as a substantial fluctuation target. Further, in the low-accuracy time-saving state and the high-accuracy time-saving state, the normal gaming state is set to the time-saving gaming state, and the first variable starting port 120B is frequently controlled to the open state. Therefore, in these two gaming states, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to allow the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B. In both of these two gaming states, the same variation pattern random number determination table is selected, but these two gaming states are common in that the normal gaming state is the reduced working hours gaming state. In other words, when the normal game state is the short-time game state, the big role lottery is performed by the special 1 hold which is the actual fluctuation target, and when the lost symbol or the small hit symbol is determined, the fluctuation time of 1 second is always determined. NS. Further, in the case of the low probability time saving state and the high probability time saving state, the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold, and when the big hit symbol is decided, the fluctuation time is always decided to be 30 seconds.

In the high-probability precursor state, the special 1 hold is set as a real fluctuation target. Further, in the high-accuracy precursor state, the normal gaming state is set to the reduced working hours gaming state, and the first variable starting port 120B is frequently controlled to the open state. Therefore, in the high-accuracy precursor state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to allow the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B. In the high-probability precursor state, the big role lottery is performed by the special 1 hold which is the target of the actual fluctuation, and when the lost symbol or the small hit symbol is determined, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 3 seconds to 10 seconds. In addition, in the high probability precursor state, when the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold and the big hit symbol is decided, the fluctuation time is always decided to be 30 seconds.

On the other hand, in the low-probability time-shortening state, the high-probability time-shortening state, and the high-probability precursor state, that is, when the normal gaming state is the time-shortening gaming state and the major role lottery is performed by the special 2 hold that is not the target of the actual fluctuation, Regardless of the determined symbol type, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 10 minutes.

In the penalty state, the special 1 hold is set as a real fluctuation target. Further, in the penalty state, the normal gaming state is set to the medium-time short-time gaming state, and the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to the open state at a constant frequency. Therefore, in the penalty state, the player needs to launch the game ball toward the second game area 116b in order to allow the game ball to enter the first variable starting port 120B. In the penalty state, the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold which is the actual fluctuation target, and when the lost symbol or the small hit symbol is determined, the fluctuation time is determined within the range of 3 to 100 seconds. In addition, in the penalty state, when the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 1 hold and the big hit symbol is decided, the fluctuation time is decided within the range of 40 to 100 seconds.

On the other hand, in the penalty state, when the big winning combination lottery is performed by the special 2 hold which is not the target of the actual fluctuation, the fluctuation time is always determined to be 10 minutes regardless of the determined symbol type.

As described above, the actual fluctuation target is set for each game state, and when the major winning combination lottery based on the hold type as the actual fluctuation target is performed, the fluctuation time is 100 seconds at the longest. On the other hand, when a large winning combination lottery based on a hold type that is not a target of substantial fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation time is approximately 10 minutes, so that a game contrary to the original game playability is not performed.

In the simultaneous rotation reference example, the case where the average of the fluctuation time of the high-accuracy time-shortening state is shorter than the average of the fluctuation time of the high-accuracy precursor state is described. It may be longer than the average fluctuation time of the precursory state. That is, the average of the fluctuation time in the high-accuracy time-shortening state and the average of the fluctuation time in the high-accuracy precursor state may be different.

FIG. 14 is a first diagram for explaining a special electric accessory operating ram set table according to a simultaneous turning reference example, and FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining a special electric accessory operating ram set table according to a simultaneous turning reference example. It is a figure of 2. The special electric accessory operating ram set table stores various data for controlling the large role game or the small hit game, and the special electric accessory operating ram set is stored during the large role game and the small hit game. With reference to the table, the first prize-winning port solenoid 126c or the second prize-winning port solenoid 128c is energized and controlled. In reality, a plurality of special electric accessory operating ram set tables are provided for each type of special symbol (big hit symbol and small hit symbol), and the corresponding table plays a major role according to the determined special symbol type. It is set at the start of the game or small hit game, but here, for convenience of explanation, the control data of the special symbol is shown for each symbol type.

As shown in FIG. 14, the big winning game is composed of a plurality of round games in which the big winning opening is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the small hit game is executed only once. According to this special electric accessory actuating ram set table, the opening time (waiting time until the first round game is started), the maximum number of special electric accessory actuations (executed during one large role game or small hit game). Number of round games to be played), number of times special electric accessory opening / closing switching (number of times the large winning opening is opened in one round), solenoid energization time (first large winning opening solenoid 126c or second for each number of opening of the large winning opening) Energizing time of the large winning opening solenoid 128c, that is, the opening time of one large winning opening), the specified number (the maximum number of winnings that can be made to the large winning opening in one round game), the effective closing time of the large winning opening (round) Closing time of the big winning opening between games, that is, interval time), ending time (waiting time from the end of the last round game to the restart of the normal special game (variation display of the symbol described later)) However, as control data, it is stored in advance for each type of special symbol as shown in the figure.

If the jackpot is won by holding the special 1 and the special symbols A, B, and D are determined as the jackpot symbols, the major role game composed of four round games is executed. In this big role game, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the 1st to 4th round games. In each round game, the first large winning opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and when a specified number of game balls enter during this period or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) elapses, the first prize is opened. One big winning opening 126 is closed and one round game is completed.

In addition, when a jackpot is won by holding special 1 and special symbols C and E are determined as jackpot symbols, a major role game composed of 10 round games is executed. In these big role games, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the 1st to 10th round games. In each round game, the first large winning opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and when a specified number of game balls enter during this period or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) elapses, the first prize is opened. One big winning opening 126 is closed and one round game is completed.

Further, when the small hit is won by the special 1 hold and the special symbols Z1 to Z3 are determined as the small hit symbols, the small hit game composed of one round game is executed. In this small hit game, the second big winning opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds × 1 time in one round game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, when a jackpot is won by holding special 2 and special symbols F, G, and I are determined as jackpot symbols, a major role game composed of four round games is executed. NS. In this big role game, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the 1st to 4th round games. In each round game, the first large winning opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and when a specified number of game balls enter during this period or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) elapses, the first prize is opened. One big winning opening 126 is closed and one round game is completed.

In addition, when a jackpot is won by holding special 2 and special symbols H and J are determined as jackpot symbols, a major role game composed of 10 round games is executed. In this big role game, the first big winning opening 126 is opened only once in each of the 1st to 10th round games. In each round game, the first large winning opening 126 is opened for a maximum of 29.0 seconds, and when a specified number of game balls enter during this period or the maximum opening time (29.0 seconds) elapses, the first prize is opened. One big winning opening 126 is closed and one round game is completed.

Further, even when a small hit is won by holding the special 2 and special symbols Z4 to Z6 are determined as the small hit symbols, the small hit game consisting of one round game is executed. Here, in the small hit game when the special symbol Z4 is determined as the small hit symbol, the second big winning opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds × 2 times in one round game. The interval time during the round, which is the rest time between the two opening of the second prize opening 128, is set to 1.78 seconds. Since the game ball is fired at the shortest interval of 0.6 seconds, considering the opening time of the second big winning opening 128 and the firing interval of the game ball, the game ball wins the second big prize during this small hit game. The probability of entering the mouth 128 is low.

However, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the structure is such that the game ball easily stays on the movable piece 128b that keeps the second large winning opening 128 in the closed state, and the movable piece 128b is moved to the open state. The game ball staying on the piece 128b is guided into the second large winning opening 128. Therefore, by opening the second large winning opening 128 for 0.1 seconds x 2 times, an average of 2 to 3 game balls will enter the 2nd large winning opening 128.

Further, in the small hit game when the special symbol Z5 is determined as the small hit symbol, the second big winning opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds × 3 times in one round game. The interval time during the round in this case is set to 0.84 seconds. In this small hit game, an average of 3 to 4 game balls enter the second large winning opening 128.

Further, in the small hit game when the special symbol Z6 is determined as the small hit symbol, the second big winning opening 128 is opened 0.1 seconds × 12 times in one round game. The interval time during the round in this case is set to 0.84 seconds. In this small hit game, by continuously firing the game balls toward the second game area 116b, it is almost certain that a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls will enter the second large winning opening 128. can.

At the design stage of the gaming machine 100, it is necessary to strictly manage and adjust the firing prize ball ratio, which is the ratio between the number of launched balls of the gaming ball and the number of prize balls paid out. Therefore, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, a special symbol Z4 in which the 0.1 second opening is performed twice in the small hit game and a special symbol Z5 in which the 0.1 second opening is performed three times in the small hit game are provided. By simply changing these selection ratios, the firing prize ball ratio can be easily adjusted and changed.

FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a game state setting table for setting a game state after the end of the major role game according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, when the big role game is executed, the game state setting table is referred to according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the hold type, and the type of the special symbol (big hit symbol), and after the big role game is completed. Set the game state of.

When the game state at the time of winning the big hit is a normal state or a penalty state, if the big hit is won by holding the special 1 which is a real fluctuation target, the game state after the big role game is set according to the type of the big hit symbol. Specifically, when the special symbol A is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to the low probability time saving state (the special gaming state is the low probability gaming state, and the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state). At this time, the number of times the time-saving game state is continued (hereinafter, referred to as "time-saving number of times") is set to 100 times. This means that the reduced working hours game state will continue until the major role lottery is held 100 times. However, the above-mentioned number of time reductions indicates the maximum number of continuations in the time-saving game state of 1, and if a big hit is won before reaching the above number of continuations, the game state is set again. It will be. Therefore, when the time-saving game state is set after the end of the big role game, if the lottery result other than the big hit is derived 100 times without deriving the lottery result of the big hit in the time-saving game state, the non-time-saving game state The game state will be changed to (normal state).

When the special symbols B and D are determined as the jackpot symbols, the high-probability time-saving state (the special gaming state is the high-probability gaming state and the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state) is set. At this time, "next time" is set as the high probability number, and the high probability gaming state continues until the next big hit is won. In addition, "next time" is set as the number of time reductions, and the time reduction game state continues until the next big hit is won. Therefore, when the special symbols B and D are determined, the high-accuracy time-saving state will continue until the next big hit is won after the big role game.

When the special symbols C and E are determined as the jackpot symbols, the high probability precursor state (the special gaming state is the high-probability gaming state and the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state) is set. At this time, "next time" is set as the high probability number, and the time reduction number is set to 100 times. When the special symbols C and E are determined, the high-probability gaming state continues until the next big hit is won, while the time-saving gaming state ends in 100 times. Therefore, when the special symbols C and E are determined, the game state shifts to the most dominant state when the result of the big role lottery is derived 100 times after the big role game.

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is a normal state or a penalty state, if the big hit is won by the special 2 hold which is not a substantial fluctuation target, the game state after the big role game is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol F is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to the normal state (the special gaming state is the low-probability gaming state, and the normal gaming state is the non-time-saving gaming state). When the special symbols G to J are determined as the jackpot symbols, the penalty state (the special gaming state is the high-probability gaming state, and the normal gaming state is the medium-time short-time gaming state) is set. At this time, both the high accuracy number and the time reduction number are set to "next time".

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the most dominant state, if the big hit is won by the special 1 hold which is not the target of the actual fluctuation, the game state after the big role game is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol A is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to the low probability time saving state (the special gaming state is the low probability gaming state, and the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state). At this time, the number of time reductions is set to 100 times. Further, when the special symbols B to E are determined as the jackpot symbols, the game state after the big role game is set as in the normal state and the penalty state.

On the other hand, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the most dominant state, if the big hit is won by the special 2 hold which is the actual fluctuation target, the game state after the big role game is set as follows. That is, when the special symbol F is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to the low probability time saving state (the special gaming state is the low probability gaming state, and the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state). At this time, the number of time reductions is set to 100 times. When the special symbols G and I are determined as the jackpot symbols, the high-probability time-saving state (the special gaming state is the high-probability gaming state and the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state) is set. At this time, the high accuracy number and the time reduction number are set to "next time".

When the special symbols H and J are determined as the jackpot symbols, the high probability precursor state (the special gaming state is the high-probability gaming state and the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state) is set. At this time, the high accuracy number is set to "next time" and the time reduction number is set to 100 times.

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability time reduction state, a high probability time reduction state, or a high probability precursor state, that is, when the normal game state is the time reduction game state, the game state after the big role game is the normal state. And set in the same way as the penalty state.

FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a hit determination random number determination table according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. When the game ball flowing down the game area 116 passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal drawing operating port 125, it is associated with whether or not the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B is energized and controlled. Judgment processing of ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as "general drawing lottery") is performed.

As will be described in detail later, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal drawing operating port 125, one hit determination random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 99, and this disturbance Numerical values are stored in the general drawing reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c up to a maximum of four. That is, the normal figure reservation storage area includes four storage units for storing the winning determination random numbers. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 or enters the normal figure operating port 125 in a state where the determined random numbers are stored in all four storage units of the normal figure reservation storage area, the game is concerned. The winning random number is not stored based on the passage of the sphere. In the following, the hit determination random number stored in the normal figure hold storage area when the game ball passes through the gate 124 or the game ball enters the normal figure operation port 125 is referred to as a normal figure hold.

When the normal drawing lottery is started when the normal game state is the non-time saving game state, the hit determination random number determination table for the non-time saving game state is referred to as shown in FIG. 17A. According to this non-time saving game state hit determination random number determination table, when the hit determination random number is 0, the hit symbol is determined as the type of the normal symbol, and when the hit determination random number is 1 to 99, A lost symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol. Therefore, the probability that the winning symbol is determined in the non-time saving game state, that is, the winning probability is 1/100. As will be described in detail later, when the winning symbol is determined in this general drawing lottery, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B is controlled to be in the open state, and when the lost symbol is determined, the first variable starting The movable piece 120b of the mouth 120B is maintained in the closed state.

Further, when starting the normal drawing lottery in the medium-time short-time game state, as shown in FIG. 17B, the hit determination random number determination table for the medium-time short-time game state is referred to. According to the hit determination random number determination table for the medium-time short game state, when the hit determination random number is 0 to 49, the hit symbol is determined as the type of the normal symbol, and the hit determination random number is 50 to 99. In addition, the lost symbol is determined as the type of the normal symbol. Therefore, the probability that the winning symbol is determined in the medium-time short-time game state, that is, the winning probability is 50/100.

Further, when starting the normal drawing lottery in the time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 17 (c), the hit determination random number determination table for the time-saving game state is referred to. According to the hit determination random number determination table for the time-saving game state, when the hit determination random number is 0 to 98, the hit symbol is determined as the type of the normal symbol, and when the hit determination random number is 99, it is normal. A lost symbol is determined as the type of symbol. Therefore, the probability that the winning symbol is determined in the time-saving game state, that is, the winning probability is 99/100.

FIG. 18A is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol fluctuation time data table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 18B is a diagram for explaining an opening / closing control pattern table according to a simultaneous rotation reference example. As described above, when the general drawing lottery is performed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined. The normal symbol fluctuation time data table is referred to when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined when the winning symbol or the lost symbol is determined by the ordinary symbol lottery. According to this normal symbol fluctuation time data table, when the gaming state is set to the non-short-time gaming state and the medium-time short-time gaming state, the fluctuation time is determined to be 10 seconds, and the gaming state is set to the short-time gaming state. If so, the fluctuation time is determined to be 1 second. When the fluctuation time is determined in this way, the normal symbol display 168 is displayed in a variable manner (blinking display) over the determined time. Then, when the winning symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, and when the lost symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is turned off.

Then, when the winning symbol is determined by the ordinary symbol lottery and the normal symbol display 168 is lit, the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B is opened / closed controlled as shown in FIG. 18 (b). Energization is controlled with reference to the pattern table. Actually, the open / close control pattern table is provided for each game state, and the corresponding table is set at the start of energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 120c according to the game state when the normal symbol is determined. ..

When the winning symbol is determined, as shown in FIG. 18B, the opening / closing control of the first variable starting port 120B is controlled with reference to the opening / closing control pattern table. According to this opening / closing control pattern table, the time before opening the normal electric power (waiting time until the opening of the first variable starting port 120B is started) and the maximum number of times of switching the opening / closing of the ordinary electric accessory (opening of the first variable starting port 120B). Number of times), solenoid energization time (energization time of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c for each opening number of the first variable starting port 120B, that is, one opening time of the first variable starting port 120B), specified number (first variable) The maximum number of winnings to the first variable starting port 120B while the starting port 120B is fully opened), the effective closing time of the normal electric power (the closing time between each opening of the first variable starting port 120B, that is, the pause time), the general electric power Effective state time (waiting time from the end of the last opening of the first variable start port 120B), normal power end wait time (waiting until the fluctuation display of the normal symbol described later is resumed after the normal electric power effective state time elapses) Time) is stored in advance as control data of the first variable starting port 120B for each gaming state as shown in the figure.

In this way, by setting the winning probability, the fluctuation time, and the opening time of the normal symbol, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 18B, the firing prize ball ratio (for the game ball launched in the game area 116) The number of shots of the first variable starting port 120B, the second starting port 122, the normal drawing operating port 125, and the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out to the player when the game ball enters the large winning opening) is the number of shots in the non-time saving game state. : The number of prize balls = 100: 20, the number of shots in the medium-time short game state: the number of prize balls = 100: 40, and the number of shots in the short-time game state: the number of prize balls = 100: 99.

The opening / closing condition of the first variable starting port 120B defines three elements: the winning probability of the normal symbol, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the first variable starting port 120B. That is, by combining the three elements of the winning probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the first variable start port 120B, in each of the non-time saving game state, the medium time saving game state, and the time saving game state, The frequency of entering the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B and the firing prize ball ratio can be set. In any case, the combination of the three elements shown here is only an example, and if the three elements are combined so that the firing prize ball ratio is higher in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state. good.

FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state according to the original game playability according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. With the above configuration, the gaming machine 100 realizes the following playability. Here, the case where the registration setting value is set to "1" will be described. First, in the initial state of the gaming machine 100, it is set to the normal state shown in FIG. 19A. In the normal state, since the substantially variable target is set to the special 1 hold, the player launches the game ball toward the first game area 116a in order to allow the game ball to enter the first fixed start port 120A. Since the first game area 116a is located on the left side of the game board 108, the player performs a so-called "left-handed" in a normal state.

When the game ball enters the first fixed start port 120A, the special 1 hold is stored in the first special figure hold storage area. The special 1 hold stored in the first special figure hold storage area is sequentially read out when the start condition is satisfied, and a large winning combination lottery is performed based on the read special 1 hold. At this time, the winning probability of the jackpot is set to about 1 / 300.6. In the normal state, in the big role lottery based on this special 1 hold, the game is played for the purpose of winning the big hit. The firing prize ball ratio when the game ball is launched toward the first game area 116a is set to 100:20, and the number of game balls decreases during the game.

Then, in the normal state, if a big hit is won in the big role lottery by holding the special 1, the big role game is executed. In this big role game, a round game in which the first big winning opening 126 is opened is executed four or ten times, and the player can win a prize ball for four or ten rounds. Then, when the jackpot is won by holding the special 1, one of the special symbols A to E is determined as the jackpot symbol.

In the normal state, when the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 is the special symbol A, the gaming state after the big role game is the low probability time saving state shown in FIG. 19 (b). If the jackpot is won with the special 1 hold, the probability that the special symbol A will be determined as the jackpot symbol is 30%. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the normal state, there is a 30% chance that the gaming state will shift to the low probability time saving state. In the low-probability time-saving state, the actual fluctuation target is set to special 1 hold, but since the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the player has to put the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. 2 Right-handed hitting aimed at the game area 116b will be performed.

That is, in this low probability time saving state, as in the normal state, the game is played for the purpose of winning the big hit in the big role lottery based on the special 1 hold. In the low-probability time-saving state, the winning probability of the jackpot is about 1 / 300.6, but since the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the movable piece 120b is frequently opened. Therefore, the launch prize ball ratio is 100:99, and the player can aim for a big hit while reducing the consumption of the game ball.

In addition, when the state shifts to the low probability time saving state, the number of time saving times is set to 100 times, and if the big hit is not won in the 100 times big role lottery, the game state shifts to the normal state again (time saving omission). ).

Further, in the normal state, when the jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 are the special symbols B and D, the gaming state after the big role game is the high accuracy time reduction shown in FIG. 19 (c). It becomes a state. If the jackpot is won with the special 1 hold, the probability that the special symbols B and D will be determined as the jackpot symbols is 35%. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the normal state, there is a 35% probability that the gaming state will shift to the high-accuracy time-saving state. In the high-accuracy time-saving state, the actual fluctuation target is set to special 1 hold, but since the normal game state is the time-saving game state, the player has to put the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. 2 Right-handed hitting aimed at the game area 116b will be performed.

That is, in this high-accuracy time-saving state, as in the normal state, the game is played for the purpose of winning the big hit in the big role lottery based on the special 1 hold. In the high-accuracy time-saving state, the winning probability of the jackpot is about 1 / 105.7, and since the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the movable piece 120b is frequently opened. Therefore, the ratio of the launch prize balls is 100:99, and the player can perform the big role lottery while reducing the consumption of the game balls. Therefore, in the high-accuracy time-saving state, it can be said that the next big hit is virtually guaranteed.

Further, in the normal state, when the jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 are the special symbols C and E, the gaming state after the major role game is a highly accurate precursor shown in FIG. 19 (d). It becomes a state. If the jackpot is won with the special 1 hold, the probability that the special symbols C and E will be determined as the jackpot symbols is 35%. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the normal state, there is a 35% probability that the gaming state will shift to the high-probability precursor state. In the high-accuracy precursor state, the actual fluctuation target is set to the special 1 hold, but since the normal game state is the short-time game state, the player has to put the game ball into the first variable starting port 120B. 2 Right-handed hitting aimed at the game area 116b will be performed.

When the special symbols C and E are determined, the high probability precursor state is set and the number of time reductions is set to 100 times. At this time, when the number of fluctuations after the big role game reaches 100 times, the time-saving game state ends, and the normal game state becomes the non-time-saving game state. As a result, the gaming state shifts to the most dominant state shown in FIG. 19 (e) due to the time saving omission. As will be described in detail later, in the most dominant state, the number of game balls can be increased simply by continuously firing the game balls toward the second game area 116b. Therefore, in the high-accuracy precursor state, the goal of the game is not to win the jackpot, but to get out of the game in a short time without winning the jackpot.

According to the special 1 hold of the actual fluctuation target in the high-accuracy precursor state, the high-accuracy time-shortening state, and the low-accuracy time-saving state, when the jackpot is won, the special symbols A to E are determined as the jackpot symbols. When the special symbol A is determined, four round games are executed in the big role game, and the game state after the big role game becomes the low probability time saving state shown in FIG. 19 (b). Further, when the special symbols B and D are determined, the round game is executed 4 times or 10 times in the big role game, and the game state after the big role game becomes a highly accurate time saving state. Further, when the special symbols C and E are determined, the round game is executed 4 times or 10 times in the big role game, and the game state after the big role game becomes a high probability precursor state.

In the most dominant state, when the game ball enters the second starting port 122, the special 2 hold is stored in the second special figure hold storage area. The special 2 hold stored in the second special figure hold storage area is sequentially read when the start condition is satisfied, and a large winning combination lottery is performed based on the read special 2 hold. At this time, the winning probability of the big hit is set to about 1 / 105.7, and the winning probability of the small hit is set to about 1 / 3.45. In the most dominant state, in the big role lottery based on this special 2 hold, winning a small hit is the main purpose of the game.

Specifically, when a game ball is launched into the second game area 116b, the ratio of the prize balls paid out by entering the game ball into the second starting port 122 with respect to the number of launched balls is 100: 60 to 80. It is set to the degree. Then, in the most dominant state, in the large winning combination lottery by holding the special 2, the small hit game is frequently performed because the small hit is won with a probability of about 1 / 3.45. Here, when the small hit is won by the special 2 hold, the small hit symbols Z4 to Z6 are determined. As described above, in the small hit game when the small hit symbol Z4 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, an average of 2 to 3 game balls enter the second large winning opening 128. In the small hit game when the small hit symbol Z5 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, an average of 3 to 4 game balls enter the second large winning opening 128. Further, in the small hit game when the small hit symbol Z6 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, a substantially specified number of game balls enter the second large winning opening 128.

When a game ball enters the second prize opening 128, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out for each game ball. As a result, in the most dominant state, the ratio of all prize balls to the number of shot balls is 100: 120, and the game balls are simply fired toward the second game area 116b. Can be increased.

In this most dominant state, the normal gaming state is the non-time saving gaming state, and the movable piece 120b is rarely opened. Further, in the most dominant state, the special gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, and the winning probability of the jackpot in the most dominant state is about 1 / 105.7. It can be said that the jackpot winning is guaranteed.

According to the special 2 hold of the real fluctuation target in this most dominant state, when the jackpot is won, the special symbols F to J are determined as the jackpot symbols. When the special symbol F is determined, four round games are executed in the big role game, and the game state after the big role game becomes the low probability time saving state shown in FIG. 19 (b). Further, when the special symbols G and I are determined, the round game is executed 4 times or 10 times in the big role game, and the game state after the big role game becomes a highly accurate time saving state. Further, when the special symbols H and J are determined, the round game is executed 4 times or 10 times in the big role game, and the game state after the big role game becomes a high probability precursor state.

Since the most dominant state has an extremely high degree of advantage as compared with other gaming states, the greatest purpose of the game in the gaming machine 100 is to shift the gaming state to the most dominant state. As described above, the game is first started in the normal state, but does not shift from this normal state to the most dominant state at once. Therefore, the transition route to the most dominant state via the high-accuracy precursor state becomes the transition route to the most dominant state in the gaming machine 100.

Further, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, it is set as a condition for transition from the high probability precursor state to the highest advantage state to win a specific small hit symbol, apart from the time saving omission in the high probability precursor state. Specifically, when a small hit is won by holding special 1 which is a real fluctuation target in a high probability precursor state, the special symbol Z1 is 1%, the special symbol Z2 is 69%, and the special symbol Z3 is 30 as small hit symbols. It is determined with a probability of% (see FIG. 8 (c)).

At this time, if the special symbol Z1 is determined as the small hit symbol, the time-saving gaming state ends with the end of the small hit game, and as a result, the gaming state shifts to the most dominant state.

In this way, since the player shifts to the most dominant state by winning a specific small hit, the player is compared to the case where the player shifts to the most dominant state only when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number of times (100 times). Therefore, a feeling of expectation and a feeling of tension are always given.

In the above-mentioned high-probability precursor state, high-probability time-saving state, and low-probability time-saving state, a small hit is won with a probability of about 1 / 3.45. Therefore, even in the high-accuracy precursor state, the high-accuracy time-saving state, and the low-accuracy time-saving state, the small hit game is frequently executed as in the most dominant state. However, in the high-accuracy precursor state, the high-accuracy time-saving state, and the low-accuracy time-saving state, the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. Further, as will be described in detail later, the normal game state is maintained in the time-saving game state even during the small hit game. Therefore, although the second big winning opening 128 is opened during the small hit game, the first variable starting opening 120B is also opened during this time.

As described above, the first variable starting port 120B is provided above the second large winning opening 128, and in the time-saving gaming state, the opening time of the first variable starting opening 120B is the second large winning prize. It is much longer than the opening time of the mouth 128. Therefore, in the high-accuracy precursor state, the high-accuracy time-saving state, and the low-accuracy time-saving state, most of the game balls flowing down the second game area 116b enter the first variable starting port 120B and enter the second large winning opening 128. Almost no game ball enters. As a result, in the high-accuracy precursor state, the high-accuracy time-saving state, and the low-accuracy time-saving state, unlike the most dominant state, even if a right-handed hit is made during the game, the number of game balls gradually decreases.

As described above, when the game progresses according to the actual fluctuation target according to the original game performance, when the big hit is won, the game state after the big role game is the low probability time saving state, the high probability time saving state, and the high probability precursor state. Set to either. In the high-probability time-saving state and the high-probability precursor state, it is common that the special gaming state is the high-probability gaming state and the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, the high-accuracy time-saving state continues until the next big hit is won, while the high-accuracy precursor state is a game by winning a specific small hit (special symbol Z1) or skipping the time. The difference is that the state is transferred to the most dominant state.

Further, in the high-accuracy time-shortening state, the fluctuation time at the time of small hit and loss is set to 1 second, whereas in the high-accuracy precursor state, the fluctuation time at the time of small hit and loss is 3 to 10 seconds. It differs in that it is set within the range (see FIG. 13 (b)). That is, the average of the fluctuation time in the high-accuracy time-shortening state is set shorter than the average of the fluctuation time in the high-accuracy precursor state.

Therefore, in the high-accuracy time-shortening state, the fluctuation time at the time of small hit and at the time of loss is relatively short, so that the actual fluctuation target can be digested at high speed until the big hit is won. Although detailed description will be omitted, in the variation time of the special symbol, the variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is performed on the sub-control board 330. In the high-accuracy time-saving state, the variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is also relatively short. Therefore, in the high-accuracy time-saving state, as long as the special 1 hold continues to be memorized, the special 1 hold (variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c) will continue to be digested at high speed, and the time until the jackpot is won will be reduced. It can be shortened, and the player can play the game until the next big hit without making the player feel stress (reduced).

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy precursor state, the fluctuation time at the time of small hit and at the time of loss is relatively long, but in the sub-control board 330, an effect of whether or not to shift to the most dominant state is performed. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the player will shift to the highest superior state.

In this way, in the high-accuracy time-shortening state, even if a specific small hit (special symbol Z1) is won, it does not shift to the most dominant state, but by setting the average fluctuation time short, the next big hit The time to win the prize can be shortened, and the stress on the player can be reduced. In addition, in the high-accuracy precursor state, the average fluctuation time is set longer than in the high-accuracy time-shortening state, but the fluctuation time can be used to produce an effect as to whether or not to shift to the most dominant state. It is possible to give a person a sense of anticipation and a sense of tension.

As described above, the high-probability time-saving state and the high-probability precursor state, which are common in that the special gaming state is the high-probability gaming state and the normal gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, are provided, and the fluctuation of the high-probability time-saving state is provided. By making the average of time shorter than the average of the fluctuation time of the high-probability precursor state, it is possible to provide new playability.

FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state when the game is not properly performed according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. As described above, in the gaming machine 100, the variation display of the symbol on the first special symbol display 160 and the variation display of the symbol on the second special symbol display 162 are simultaneously performed in parallel. At this time, if there is a possibility that the player may be disadvantaged as a result of the large winning combination lottery being held due to a hold other than the actual fluctuation target, the fluctuation time is set to a long time such as 10 minutes. However, after the big win lottery is performed by the hold other than the real change target, for example, as a result of interrupting the game, the big hit by the hold other than the real change target may be confirmed. In this case, the gaming state changes as shown in FIG.

The main processing of the main control board 300 for realizing the above-mentioned playability will be described below.

FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine state flag according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation. In the main control board 300, whether or not the game can proceed is managed by the game machine state flag. One of six types of flag values from 00H to 05H is set in the gaming machine status flag. The flag value = 00H of the gaming machine status flag indicates a game-enabled state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 00H, the game progress is controlled, and when the gaming machine status flag is other than 00H, the game is played. It will be stopped.

The flag value = 01H of the gaming machine status flag indicates the setting change state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 01H, the registered setting value can be changed. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag = 02H indicates the setting confirmation status, and when the gaming machine status flag is 02H, the registered setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 184, and the registered setting value is set. It becomes possible to confirm. The flag value = 03H of the gaming machine status flag indicates an abnormal setting state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 03H, the game is stopped because the registered setting value is abnormal. The flag value = 04H of the gaming machine status flag indicates a RAM abnormal state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 04H, the game is stopped. The flag value = 05H of the gaming machine status flag indicates a checksum abnormal state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 05H, the game is stopped. When the power is turned on, the gaming machine status flag is set to one of the flag values, and processing is performed according to the gaming machine status flag.

(CPU initialization process of main control board 300)
FIG. 22 is a first flowchart for explaining the CPU initialization process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, and FIG. 23 explains the CPU initialization process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. It is a second flowchart to be done.

When power is supplied from the power supply board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 300a, and the main CPU 300a performs the following CPU initialization process (S100).

(Step S100-1)
When the power is turned on, the main CPU 300a reads a boot program from the main ROM 300b as an initial setting process, and performs setting processes necessary for executing various processes.

(Step S100-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the wait processing time in the timer counter.

(Step S100-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the power supply cutoff warning signal is detected. The main control board 300 is provided with a power supply cutoff detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value, a power supply cutoff warning signal is output from the power supply cutoff detection circuit. If the power off warning signal is detected, the process is moved to step S100-3, and if the power off warning signal is not detected, the process is moved to step S100-7.

(Step S100-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the wait time set in step S100-3 has elapsed. As a result, if it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S100-9, and if it is determined that the wait time has not elapsed, the process is transferred to step S100-5.

(Step S100-9)
The main CPU 300a executes a process necessary for permitting access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine state flag before the power is turned off into the D register.

(Step S100-13)
The main CPU 300a calculates the checksum and determines whether the calculated checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off (normal) and whether the backup flag is normal. As a result, if it is determined that the backup flag and checksum are normal, the process is transferred to step S100-15, and if it is determined that either or both are not normal, the process is transferred to step S100-25. ..

(Step S100-15)
The main CPU 300a sets an address that does not include the set value and the gaming machine status flag at the start address of the main RAM 300c to be cleared.

(Step S100-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s (whether the RAM clear button is pressed). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM clear operation signal has been input, the process is transferred to step S100-31, and if it is determined that the RAM clear operation signal has not been input, the process is transferred to step S100-19. ..

(Step S100-19)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value of the gaming machine status flag loaded in step S100-11 is 00H (gamable state), the setting change switch 180s is on, and the middle frame 104 is open. judge. As a result, if it is determined that all three conditions are satisfied, the process is transferred to step S100-21, and if it is determined that even one of the three conditions is not satisfied, the process is transferred to step S100-23.

(Step S100-21)
The main CPU 300a sets 02H (setting confirmation state) in the gaming machine status flag. That is, when the middle frame 104 is open, the setting change switch 180s is on, and the power is normally turned on while the RAM clear button is not pressed, the setting confirmation state is set.

(Step S100-23)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process for clearing the clear target at the time of power recovery, which is an area after the start address set in step S100-15 of the main RAM 300c, and shifts the process to step S100-49.

(Step S100-25)
The main CPU 300a sets 05H (checksum abnormal state) in the D register.

(Step S100-27)
The main CPU 300a performs an out-of-area read / write check process for checking and clearing the read / write memory in the out-of-use area.

(Step S100-29)
The main CPU 300a sets the address including the set value and the gaming machine status flag at the start address of the main RAM 300c to be cleared.

(Step S100-31)
The main CPU 300a checks and clears the read / write memory of the used area.

(Step S100-33)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the check result of the read / write memory in the step S100-31 is normal. As a result, if it is determined that the process is normal, the process is transferred to step S100-37, and if it is determined that the process is not normal, the process is transferred to step S100-35.

(Step S100-35)
The main CPU 300a sets 04H (RAM abnormal state) in the D register and shifts the processing to steps S100-45.

(Step S100-37)
The main CPU 300a determines whether 02H (setting confirmation state) is set in the D register. As a result, if it is determined that 02H is set, the process is transferred to step S100-39, and if it is determined that 02H is not set, the process is transferred to step S100-41.

(Step S100-39)
The main CPU 300a sets 00H (playable state) in the D register.

(Step S100-41)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied. As a result, if it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied, the process is transferred to step S100-43, and if it is determined that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the process is transferred to step S100-45. Here, at least, the setting change condition is that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, the middle frame 104 is open, and the RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s. included.

(Step S100-43)
The main CPU 300a sets 01H (setting change state) in the D register.

(Step S100-45)
The main CPU 300a saves the value set in the D register in the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S100-47)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process for clearing the clear target at the time of clearing the RAM in the main RAM 300c, and shifts the process to steps S100-49.

(Step S100-49)
The main CPU 300a performs a transmission process (storing the RAM clear designation command in the transmission buffer) of a payout command (RAM clear designation command) for transmitting to the payout control board 310 that the main RAM 300c has been cleared.

(Step S100-51)
The main CPU 300a loads the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S100-53)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the gaming machine status flag loaded in step S100-51 is 00H (gamable state). As a result, if it is determined that it is 00H, the process is transferred to step S110, and if it is determined that it is not 00H, the process is transferred to steps S100-55.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a performs subcommand group set processing. The subcommand group set processing will be described later.

(Step S100-55)
The main CPU 300a performs a subcommand group set process for transmitting a predetermined command to the subcommand board 330.

(Step S100-57)
The main CPU 300a sets the timer interrupt cycle.

(Step S100-59)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for disabling interrupts.

(Step S100-61)
The main CPU 300a updates the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number. The initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number is for determining the initial value and the ending value of the winning symbol random number. That is, when the hit symbol random number goes around from the initial value update random number for the hit symbol random number to the initial value update random number -1 for the hit symbol random number by the update process of the hit symbol random number described later, the hit symbol random number is obtained at that time. It will be updated to the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number.

(Step S100-63)
The main CPU 300a analyzes the received data (main command) received from the payout control board 310 and executes various processes according to the received data.

(Step S100-65)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for transmitting a subcommand stored in the transmission buffer to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S100-67)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for permitting an interrupt.

(Step S100-69)
The main CPU 300a updates the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern random number, and thereafter repeats the process from step S100-59. In the following, the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern random number for determining the variation effect pattern are collectively referred to as a variation effect random number.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating a subcommand group set process (S110) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S110-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S110-3)
The main CPU 300a performs a subcommand group set process for transmitting a predetermined command to the subcommand board 330.

(Step S110-5)
The main CPU 300a performs a model command setting process for setting a model command indicating model information of the gaming machine 100 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-7)
The main CPU 300a performs a setting value specification command setting process for setting a setting value specification command indicating a registration setting value in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure 1 hold designation command setting process for setting a special figure 1 hold designation command indicating the number of special 1 hold in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-11)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure 2 hold designation command setting process for setting a special figure 2 hold designation command indicating the number of special 2 hold designations in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-13)
The main CPU 300a performs a number-of-times command setting process for setting a number-of-times command indicating the remaining number of times in the time-saving game state in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a variation pattern selection state specification command setting process for setting a variation pattern selection state specification command indicating the variation pattern selection state in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure phase designation command setting process for setting a special figure phase designation command indicating the special game management phase in the transmission buffer. The special game management phase will be described later.

(Step S110-19)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase is in the special symbol change waiting state. As a result, if it is determined that the state is in the special symbol change waiting state, the process is shifted to step S110-21, and if it is determined that the special symbol change waiting state is not in effect, the subcommand group set process is terminated.

(Step S110-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the customer waiting designation command in the transmission buffer, and ends the subcommand group set process.

Next, interrupt processing on the main control board 300 will be described. Here, the save process (XINT interrupt process) and the timer interrupt process when the power is turned off will be described.

(Evacuation processing when the power of the main control board 300 is turned off (XINT interrupt processing))
FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an evacuation process (XINT interrupt process) when the power is turned off in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. The main CPU 300a monitors the power supply cutoff detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value, it interrupts the CPU initialization process and executes the power failure saver process.

(Step S300-1)
When the power cutoff warning signal is input, the main CPU 300a saves the register.

(Step S300-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the power off warning signal.

(Step S300-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the power supply cutoff warning signal is detected. As a result, if it is determined that the power off warning signal has been detected, the process is transferred to step S300-11, and if it is determined that the power off warning signal has not been detected, the process is transferred to step S300-7. ..

(Step S300-7)
The main CPU 300a restores the register.

(Step S300-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for permitting an interrupt, and ends the save process when the power is turned off.

(Step S300-11)
The main CPU 300a executes an output port clearing process for stopping the output of the output port.

(Step S300-13)
The main CPU 300a executes a checksum setting process for calculating and saving the checksum.

(Step S300-15)
The main CPU 300a executes the RAM protection setting process necessary for prohibiting access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S300-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a predetermined number of times of power failure detection signal detection to the counter value of the loop counter in order to set the power failure occurrence monitoring time.

(Step S300-19)
The main CPU 300a checks the power off warning signal.

(Step S300-21)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the power supply cutoff warning signal is detected. As a result, if it is determined that the power off warning signal has been detected, the process is transferred to step S300-17, and if it is determined that the power off warning signal has not been detected, the process is transferred to step S300-23. ..

(Step S300-23)
The main CPU 300a subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter set in step S300-17.

(Step S300-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the loop counter is not 0. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S300-19, and if it is determined that the counter value is 0, the process proceeds to the CPU initialization process (step S100) described above.

When the power is actually cut off, the operation of the gaming machine 100 is stopped while looping steps S300-17 to S300-25.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board 300)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. The main control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit that generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds in the simultaneous rotation reference example, hereinafter referred to as “4 ms”). Then, when a clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, the CPU initialization process (step S100) is interrupted and the following timer interrupt process is executed.

(Step S400-1)
The main CPU 300a saves the register.

(Step S400-3)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for permitting an interrupt.

(Step S400-5)
The main CPU 300a outputs the common data set in the common output buffer to the output port, and outputs the first special symbol display 160, the second special symbol display 162, the first special symbol hold display 164, and the second special symbol display. A dynamic port output process for lighting control of the display 166, the normal symbol display 168, the normal symbol hold display 170, the right-handed notification display 172, and the performance display monitor 184 is executed.

(Step S400-7)
The main CPU 300a reads various input port information and executes a port input process for accurately acquiring the latest switch state.

(Step S400-9)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S400-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 is 00H (gamable state). As a result, if it is determined that it is 00H, the process is transferred to step S400-15, and if it is determined that it is not 00H, the process is transferred to step S400-13.

(Step S400-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 is 03H (setting abnormality state) or more. As a result, if it is determined that it is 03H or more, the process is transferred to step S400-29, and if it is determined that it is not 03H or more, the process is transferred to step S450.

(Step S450)
The main CPU 300a executes the setting-related processing and shifts the processing to steps S400-29. The setting-related processing will be described later.

(Step S400-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a timer update process for updating various timer counters. Here, the various timer counters are subtracted each time the timer interrupt process of the main control board 300 is performed, and the subtraction is stopped when it reaches 0, unless otherwise specified.

(Step S400-17)
Similar to step S100-61, the main CPU 300a executes the update process of the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number.

(Step S400-19)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of updating the winning symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is added and updated by 1, and when the added result exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter makes one round, at that time. Update the initial value for the winning symbol random number Update the random number from the value of the random number.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the hardware random number updated by the hardware random number generator built in the main control board 300 is used as the jackpot determination random number and the hit determination random number. The hardware random number generator updates both the jackpot random number and the hit random number according to a certain rule, automatically changes the random number sequence each time the random number sequence goes around, and sets the start value every time the system is reset. I'm changing.

(Step S500)
The main CPU 300a includes a first fixed start port detection switch 120As, a first variable start port detection switch 120Bs, a second start port detection switch 122s, a gate detection switch 124s, a normal figure operation port detection switch 125s, and a first grand prize opening detection switch. In 126s, the switch management process for determining whether or not a signal is input from the second large winning opening detection switch 128s is executed. The details of this switch management process will be described later.

(Step S600)
The main CPU 300a executes a special game management process for controlling the progress of the variable display of the special symbol based on the special 2 hold of the special games. The details of this special game management process will be described later.

(Step S600)
The main CPU 300a executes a special game management process for controlling the progress of the variable display of the special symbol based on the special 1 hold of the special games. Here, the same program (module) as the special game management process for controlling the progress of the variable display of the special symbol based on the special 2 hold is read out, and the variable display of the special symbol based on the special 1 hold is advanced. A special game management process for controlling will be executed.

(Step S700)
The main CPU 300a executes a special electric accessory game management process for controlling the progress of the large role game and the small hit game in the special game. The details of this special electric accessory game management process will be described later.

(Step S800)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal game management process for controlling the progress of the normal game. The details of this normal game management process will be described later.

(Step S400-21)
The main CPU 300a executes error management processing for determining various errors and making settings according to the error determination results.

(Step S400-23)
The main CPU 300a checks the general winning opening detection switch 118s, the first starting opening detection switch 120s, the second starting opening detection switch 122s, the first major winning opening detection switch 126s, and the second major winning opening detection switch 128s, and corresponds to the above. The winning opening switch process for adding the counter for controlling the winning ball to be performed is executed.

(Step S400-25)
The main CPU 300a executes a payout control management process for creating and transmitting a payout command based on the counter value of the prize ball control counter set in step S400-23.

(Step S400-27)
The main CPU 300a launches a game ball to transmit a launch position designation command indicating which of the first game area 116a and the second game area 116b to launch the game ball to the sub-control board 330. Execute the position specification management process.

(Step S400-29)
The main CPU 300a executes an external information management process for setting output data for external information to be output from the game information output terminal plate 312 to the outside.

(Step S400-31)
The main CPU 300a includes a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol hold indicator 164, a second special symbol hold indicator 166, a normal symbol display 168, and a normal symbol hold indicator 170. , The LED display setting process for setting the display data for lighting control of various indicators (LEDs) such as the right-handed notification indicator 172 in the output buffer corresponding to each common is executed.

(Step S400-33)
The main CPU 300a synthesizes the solenoid output images of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c, the first winning opening solenoid 126c, and the second winning opening solenoid 128c, and executes a solenoid output image compositing process for storing in the output port buffer. ..

(Step S400-35)
The main CPU 300a executes a port output process for outputting the value of the common output buffer stored in each output port buffer to the output port.

(Step S400-37)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for disabling interrupts.

(Step S400-39)
The main CPU 300a uses the unused area of the main RAM 300c to perform processing for calculating the base ratio to be displayed on the performance display monitor 184, and common data for displaying the calculated base ratio on the performance display monitor 184 is common. Executes the performance display monitor control process to be set in the output buffer. In the performance display monitor control process, the base ratio is calculated for each predetermined period. Here, the performance display monitor 184 may switch and display the base ratio of the current period and the base ratio of the period before that at predetermined time intervals. Further, the base ratio displayed on the performance display monitor 184 may be switched according to a predetermined operation.

(Step S400-41)
The main CPU 300a returns the register and ends the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating the setting-related process (S450) according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S450-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value of the gaming machine state flag is 01H (setting change state). As a result, if it is determined that it is 01H, the process is transferred to step S450-3, and if it is determined that it is not 01H, the process is transferred to step S450-15.

(Step S450-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered set value stored in the set value buffer into a predetermined processing area.

(Step S450-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the RAM clear switch 182s is pressed (whether the RAM clear operation signal is input). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 182s is pressed, the process is transferred to step S450-7, and if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 182s is not pressed, the process is transferred to step S450-9. ..

(Step S450-7)
The main CPU 300a adds 1 to the set value of the processing area.

(Step S450-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the set value of the processing area is in the range of 1 to 6. As a result, if it is determined that the set value is in the range of 1 to 6, the process is transferred to step S450-13, and if it is determined that the set value is not in the range of 1 to 6, the process is performed in step S450-11. To move.

(Step S450-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the set value of the processing area to 1.

(Step S450-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the set value of the processing area in the set value buffer.

(Step S450-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the setting change switch 180s is on. As a result, when it is determined that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, the setting-related process is terminated, and when it is determined that the setting change switch 180s is not turned on, the process is moved to step S450-17.

(Step S450-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a setting-related end specification command indicating the end of the setting-related processing in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a executes the subcommand group set process shown in FIG. 24. That is, when the setting-related processing is executed, at the end of the execution, the model command, the setting value specification command, the special figure 1 hold designation command, the special figure 2 hold designation command, the number of times command, the variation pattern selection state specification command, and the special figure phase. The designated command and the customer waiting designated command will be transmitted to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S450-19)
The main CPU 300a sets 00H (gamable state) in the gaming machine status flag, and ends the setting-related processing.

As described above, according to the simultaneous rotation reference example, when the power is turned on normally with the middle frame 104 opened, the setting change switch 180s turned on, and the RAM clear button pressed, the CPU is initially initialized. In the conversion process (FIG. 22), 01H (setting change state) is set in the gaming machine status flag. After that, timer interrupt processing is executed, but since 01H (setting change state) is set in the gaming machine status flag, all processing related to the progress of the game (steps S400-15 to S400-27 in FIG. 26). ) Is stopped and the setting related processing is executed.

The setting-related processing is repeatedly executed while the setting change switch 180s is on, and during this setting-related processing, the operation of pressing the RAM clear button is accepted as the setting change operation of the registered setting value. That is, during the setting change process (S450-1 to S450-13) for accepting the setting change operation, the registered setting value stored in the setting value buffer is one of the setting values provided in a plurality of stages according to the setting change operation. Can be switched to.

Then, when the setting change switch 180s is switched off while the gaming machine status flag is set to 01H (setting change status), the setting change processing is completed and the gaming machine status flag is set to 00H (gaming possible state). It is set. As a result, from the next timer interrupt process, the process related to the progress of the game can be executed.

Here, in the setting-related processing of the simultaneous rotation reference example, the setting value corresponding to the registration setting value is specified in the subcommand group set processing after the acceptance of the RAM clear button pressing operation, that is, the registration setting value setting change operation is completed. The command is sent to the sub-control board 330. On the other hand, while the setting change operation is being accepted, the setting value designation command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 330. In this way, while the setting change operation is being accepted, the setting value specification command is transmitted when the acceptance of the setting change operation is completed and the game progresses to a state in which the setting value specification command is not transmitted. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the risk that the registered setting value is illegally acquired.

Further, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, a plurality of flag values including at least 01H (setting change state) can be switched. Then, when 01H (setting change state) is set in the gaming machine status flag, the setting-related processing can be executed and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, since the setting-related processing is not executed while the game is in progress, the setting value specification command is not transmitted while the game is in progress, and the risk of illegal acquisition of the registered setting value is reduced. Will be done.

Next, among the timer interrupt processes described above, the switch management process in step S500, the special game management process in step S600, the special electric accessory game management process in step S700, and the normal game management process in step S800 will be described in detail. ..

FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a switch management process (step S500) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S500-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the gate detection switch is on, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the detection signal from the gate detection switch 124s is turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the gate detection switch-on is detected, the process is transferred to step S510, and if it is determined that the gate detection switch-on is not detected, the process is transferred to step S500-7.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300a executes the gate passage process based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 124. The details of this gate passing process will be described later.

(Step S500-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the normal figure operating port detection switch is on, that is, whether the game ball enters the normal drawing operating port 125 and the detection signal from the normal drawing operating port detection switch 125s is turned on. .. As a result, if it is determined that the normal figure operation port detection switch-on is detected, the process is moved to step S510, and if it is determined that the normal figure operation port detection switch-on is not detected, the process is performed in step S500-5. To move.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300a executes the gate passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the normal drawing operating port 125.

(Step S500-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the first fixed start port detection switch is on, that is, whether the game ball enters the first fixed start port 120A and the detection signal is input from the first fixed start port detection switch 120As. judge. As a result, if it is determined that the first fixed start port detection switch-on is detected, the process is shifted to step S520, and if it is determined that the first fixed start port detection switch-on is not detected, step S500-7 is performed. Move the process to.

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes the first starting port passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the first fixed starting port 120A. The details of the process of passing through the first starting port will be described later.

(Step S500-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the first variable start port detection switch is on, that is, whether the game ball enters the first variable start port 120B and the detection signal is input from the first variable start port detection switch 120Bs. judge. As a result, if it is determined that the first variable start port detection switch-on is detected, the process is shifted to step S520, and if it is determined that the first variable start port detection switch-on is not detected, step S500-11 is performed. Move the process to.

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes the first start port passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the first variable start port 120B. The details of the process of passing through the first starting port will be described later.

(Step S500-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the game ball has been properly entered into the first variable starting port 120B, and if it is determined that the game ball has not been properly entered, the first An ordinary electric accessory winning confirmation process for transmitting a command for specifying an illegal winning error of a general electric motor indicating that an illegal game ball has entered the variable starting port 120B to the sub-control board 330 is executed.

(Step S500-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the second start port detection switch is on, that is, whether the game ball has entered the second start port 122 and the detection signal has been input from the second start port detection switch 122s. As a result, if it is determined that the second start port detection switch-on is detected, the process is transferred to step S530, and if it is determined that the second start port detection switch-on is not detected, the process is performed in step S500-13. To move.

(Step S530)
The main CPU 300a executes the second starting port passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 122. The details of this second starting port passing process will be described later.

(Step S500-13)
The main CPU 300a is at the time of detecting the large winning opening detection switch on, that is, the game ball enters the first large winning opening 126 or the second large winning opening 128, and the first large winning opening detection switch 126s or the second It is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the large winning opening detection switch 128s. As a result, if it is determined that the large winning opening detection switch-on is detected, the process is shifted to step S540, and if it is determined that the large winning opening detection switch-on is not detected, the switch management process is terminated.

(Step S540)
When the main CPU 300a determines whether or not the game ball has been properly entered into the first large winning opening 126 or the second large winning opening 128, and determines that the game ball has been properly entered. Is to execute a large winning opening passing process for transmitting a large winning opening entry command indicating the entry of a game ball into the first large winning opening 126 or the second large winning opening 128 to the sub-control board 330. The details of this large winning opening passing process will be described later.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating a gate passing process (step S510) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S510-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the hit determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S510-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is the maximum value or more, that is, whether the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is 4 or more. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter is equal to or higher than the maximum value, the gate passing process is terminated, and when it is determined that the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is not equal to or higher than the maximum value. The process is transferred to step S510-5.

(Step S510-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S510-7)
The main CPU 300a calculates the target storage unit for saving the acquired hit determination random number among the four storage units in the normal figure reservation storage area.

(Step S510-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the winning determination random number acquired in step S510-1 in the target storage unit calculated in step S510-7.

(Step S510-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal figure hold designation command indicating the number of normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area in the transmission buffer, and ends the gate passing process.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating a first starting port passing process (step S520) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S520-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as a special symbol identification value. The special symbol identification value is for identifying whether the hold type is special 1 hold or special 2 hold, and the special symbol identification value (00H) indicates special 1 hold, and the special symbol identification value ( 01H) indicates special 2 hold.

(Step S520-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes the special symbol random number acquisition process and ends the first start port passing process. The special symbol random number acquisition process is executed by using a module common to the second start port passing process (step S530). Therefore, the details of the special symbol random number acquisition process will be described after the description of the second start port passing process.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating a second starting port passing process (step S530) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S530-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "01H" as a special symbol identification value.

(Step S530-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol random number acquisition process described later, and ends the second start port passage process.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol random number acquisition process (step S535) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This special symbol random number acquisition process is executed by using a common module in the first start port passage process (step S520) and the second start port passage process (step S530) described above.

(Step S535-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol identification value set in step S520-1 or step S530-1.

(Step S535-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the number of target special symbol reserved balls. Here, if the special symbol identification value loaded in step S535-1 is "00H", the counter value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter, that is, the special 1 reserved number is loaded. If the special symbol identification value loaded in step S535-1 is "01H", the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter, that is, the special 2 reserved number is loaded.

(Step S535-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the jackpot determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S535-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the number of target special symbol reserved balls loaded in step S535-3 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value. As a result, if it is determined that the value is equal to or higher than the upper limit value, the special symbol random number acquisition process is terminated, and if it is determined that the value is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S535-9.

(Step S535-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the target special symbol reserved ball count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S535-11)
The main CPU 300a calculates the target storage unit for saving the acquired jackpot determination random number among the storage units in the special figure reservation storage area.

(Step S535-13)
The main CPU 300a acquires the jackpot determination random number loaded in step S535-5, the hit symbol random number updated in step S400-19, and the variation pattern random number updated in step S100-69, and obtains the variation pattern random number updated in step S100-69. Store in the target storage unit calculated in.

(Step S535-15)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the special figure hold designation command in the transmission buffer based on the counter value loaded in step S535-15. Here, the special figure 1 hold designation command is set based on the counter value (special 1 hold number) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter, and based on the counter value (special 2 hold number) of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter. Set the special figure 2 hold designation command. As a result, each time the special 1 hold or the special 2 hold is stored, the special 1 hold number and the special 2 hold number are transmitted to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S536)
The main CPU 300a performs an effect determination process at the time of acquisition, and ends the special symbol random number acquisition process. In this acquisition-time effect determination process, the result of the large winning combination lottery, the variation pattern number, and the like are tentatively determined, and a look-ahead designation command according to the tentative determination result is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. The acquisition-time effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 33.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating the acquisition-time effect determination process (step S536) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S536-1)
The main CPU 300a selects the corresponding jackpot determination random number determination table based on the set value being set. Specifically, the corresponding jackpot determination random number determination table is selected based on the current game state and the set value being set. Then, based on the selected table and the jackpot determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13, a special symbol hit provisional determination process for provisionally determining any of jackpot, small hit, and loss is performed.

(Step S536-3)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol symbol provisional determination process for provisionally determining the special symbol. Here, if the result of the temporary large winning combination lottery in step S536-1 (the result derived by the special symbol hit provisional determination process) is a big hit or a small hit, it is stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13. Load the winning symbol random number, winning type (big hit or small hit), and hold type, select the corresponding winning symbol random number judgment table, extract the special symbol judgment data, and extract the special symbol judgment data. Save (type of big hit symbol or small hit symbol). Further, when the result of the provisional large role lottery in step S536-1 is a loss, the special symbol determination data (type of the lost symbol) for a predetermined loss is saved.

(Step S536-5)
The main CPU 300a sets the look-ahead symbol type designation command (look-ahead designation command) corresponding to the special symbol determination data saved in step S536-3 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S536-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result derived by the special symbol hit provisional determination process in step S536-1 is a big hit or a small hit. As a result, if it is determined that it is a big hit or a small hit, the process is transferred to step S536-9, and if it is determined that it is not a big hit or a small hit (it is a loss), the process is transferred to step S536-11.

(Step S536-9)
The main CPU 300a sets the jackpot reach mode determination random number determination table (see FIGS. 10B and 10) or the small hit reach mode determination random number determination table (FIGS. 10D and e), and steps. The process is transferred to S536-19.

(Step S536-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the reach group determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the reach group determination random number loaded in step S536-11 has a fixed value (9000 or more). Here, the group type is determined with reference to the reach group determination random number determination table, and this reach group determination random number determination table is selected according to the stored number of reservations. At this time, the reach group determination random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 10066, and if the value of the reach group determination random number is 9000 or more, the same reach group determination random number determination table is selected regardless of the number of reservations, and the reach is reached. If the value of the group determination random number is less than 9000, a different reach group determination random number determination table is selected according to the number of holds. In the following, among the reach group determination random numbers, the value in the range of 0 to 8999 in which different reach group determination random number determination tables are selected according to the number of reservations is set as an indefinite value, and the same reach group determination random number determination is performed regardless of the number of reservations. A value in the range of 9000 to 10006 from which the table is selected is called a fixed value. If it is determined that the reach group determination random number loaded in step S536-11 has a fixed value (9000 or more), the process is transferred to step S536-15, and the reach group determination random number loaded in step S536-11 is fixed. If it is determined that the value is not (9000 or more), the process is moved to step S536-27.

(Step S536-15)
The main CPU 300a sets a reach group determination random number determination table (see FIG. 9). A plurality of types of reach group determination random number determination tables are provided according to the number of holdings, but here, the table used when the number of holdings is 0 is selected. Then, the reach group (group type) is tentatively determined based on the set reach group determination random number determination table and the reach group determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a random number determination table for determining the reach mode at the time of loss (see FIG. 10A) corresponding to the group type provisionally determined in step S536-15, and shifts the process to step S536-19.

(Step S536-19)
The main CPU 300a has a variable mode number based on the reach mode determination random number determination table set in step S536-9 or step S536-17 and the reach mode determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13. Is tentatively decided. Further, here, the fluctuation pattern random number determination table is tentatively determined together with the fluctuation mode number.

(Step S536-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the look-ahead designation variable mode command (look-ahead designation command) corresponding to the variable mode number tentatively determined in step S536-19 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S536-23)
The main CPU 300a tentatively determines the variation pattern number based on the variation pattern random number determination table tentatively determined in step S536-19 and the variation pattern random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-25)
The main CPU 300a sets the look-ahead designation variation pattern command (look-ahead designation command) corresponding to the variation pattern number tentatively determined in step S536-23 in the transmission buffer, and ends the acquisition-time effect determination process.

(Step S536-27)
The main CPU 300a is an indefinite value command (look-ahead) indicating that the group type, that is, the variation effect pattern changes according to the number of holds when the hold is read, for the hold newly stored in the target storage unit. The designated variation mode command and the look-ahead specified variation pattern command = 7FH) are set in the transmission buffer, and the effect determination process at the time of acquisition is terminated.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating a large winning opening passing process (step S540) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S540-1)
When the main CPU 300a determines in step S500-13 that it is the time when the large winning opening detection switch-on is detected, the main CPU 300a loads the special electric accessory game management phase described in detail later. As will be described in detail later, the special electric accessory game management phase indicates the stage of execution processing of the large role game or the small hit game, that is, the progress of the large role game or the small hit game, and indicates the progress of the large role game or the small hit game. It is updated according to the stage of the execution process of the winning game.

(Step S540-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special electric accessory game management phase loaded in step S540-1 indicates a stage of execution processing equal to or higher than the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening. The special electric accessory game management phase is provided with nine stages from 00H to 08H, of which 01H to 08H corresponds to the execution processing stage equal to or higher than the pre-opening of the large winning opening. Since the big role game or the small hit game is executed when the special electric accessory game management phase is 01H to 08H, here, it is determined whether the big role game or the small hit game is currently in progress. Become. If it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase indicates the stage of execution processing equal to or higher than the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening, the processing is moved to step S540-5, and the special electric accessory game management phase is set. If it is determined that the processing does not indicate the stage of the execution processing higher than the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening, the processing is moved to step S540-7.

(Step S540-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a large winning opening command indicating that the game ball has properly entered the first large winning opening 126 or the second large winning opening 128 in the transmission buffer, and ends the large winning opening passing process. ..

(Step S540-7)
The main CPU 300a executes a predetermined error process on the assumption that the ball of the game ball is improperly entered into the first special winning opening 126 or the second special winning opening 128, and ends the large winning opening passing process.

FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a special game management phase according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. As already explained, in the simultaneous turning reference example, the special game triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, and the passage of the game ball to the gate 124 or the normal drawing operation port A normal game triggered by the entry of the game ball into 125 proceeds in parallel at the same time. The processing related to the special game is executed stepwise and repeatedly, and the main control board 300 manages each processing related to the special game by the special game management phase and the special electric accessory game management phase. ..

As shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of special game control modules for executing and controlling the variation display of the special symbol in the special game are stored in the main ROM 300b, and the special game is stored for each of these special game control modules. Management phases are associated. Specifically, when the special game management phase is "00H", the module for executing the "special symbol change waiting process" is called, and when the special game management phase is "01H", the module is called. The module for executing the "special symbol changing process" is called, and when the special game management phase is "02H", the module for executing the "special symbol stop symbol display process" is called.

Further, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of special electric accessory game control modules for executing and controlling the large role game and the small hit game among the special games, and each of these special electric accessory game control modules is stored. A special electric accessory game management phase is associated with it. Specifically, when the special electric accessory game management phase is "01H" or "05H", the module for executing the "pre-processing for opening the large winning opening" is called, and the special electric accessory game management is performed. When the phase is "02H" or "06H", the module for executing the "large winning opening opening control process" is called, and the special electric accessory game management phase is "03H" or "07H". In that case, the module for executing the "large winning opening closing effective processing" is called, and when the special electric accessory game management phase is "04H" or "08H", the "large winning opening end wait processing" is performed. The module to execute "is called. When the special electric accessory game management phase is "00H", none of the special electric accessory game control modules is called.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating a special game management process (step S600) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S600-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special electric accessory game management phase.

(Step S600-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special electric accessory game management phase loaded in step S600-1 is other than "00H". That is, here, it is determined whether the player is currently in the big role game or the small hit game. If it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase is other than "00H", the special game management process is terminated, and if it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase is not other than "00H", step S600 Move the process to -5.

(Step S600-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the special game special symbol determination flag. The special game special symbol determination flag is for determining whether the hold type to be subject to the special game management process is special 1 hold or special 2 hold, and the special game special symbol determination flag (00H). ) Indicates Special 1 hold, and the special game special symbol determination flag (01H) indicates Special 2 hold.

(Step S600-7)
The main CPU 300a inverts the special game special symbol determination flag loaded in step S600-5. Here, when the special game special symbol determination flag is "00H", it is inverted to "01H", and when the special game special symbol determination flag is "01H", it is inverted to "00H". Since the initial value of the special game special symbol determination flag is set to "00H", the special game special symbol determination is performed by the first special game management process S600 out of the two special game management processes S600 shown in FIG. The flag is set to "01H", the subsequent processing is executed for the special 2 hold, the special game special symbol determination flag is set to "00H" in the second special game management process S600, and the subsequent processing is executed for the special 1 hold. Will be done. That is, the special 2 hold is processed with priority.

(Step S600-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the special game special symbol determination flag inverted in step S600-7.

(Step S600-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the special game management phase.

(Step S600-13)
The main CPU 300a selects the special game control module corresponding to the special game management phase loaded in step S600-11.

(Step S600-15)
The main CPU 300a calls the special game control module selected in step S600-13 to start the process.

(Step S600-17)
The main CPU 300a loads a special game timer that manages the control time of the special game, and ends the special game management process.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol change waiting process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This special symbol change waiting process is executed when the special game management phase is "00H".

(Step S610-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the number of special symbol hold balls of the hold (special 1 hold or special 2 hold, hereinafter referred to as target hold) subject to the special game management process is 1 or more. As a result, if it is determined that the number of special symbol reserved balls is 1 or more, the process is shifted to step S610-3, and if it is determined that the number of special symbol reserved balls is not 1 or more, the special symbol change waiting process is performed. To finish.

(Step S610-3)
In the main CPU 300a, a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as a non-target special symbol) based on a hold (special 2 hold or special 1 hold, hereinafter referred to as a non-target hold) that is not subject to the special game management process is being determined. Determine if there is. As a result, if it is determined that the non-target special symbol is being determined, the process is shifted to step S610-5, and if it is determined that the special symbol based on the non-target special symbol is not being determined, step S610-9 is performed. Move the process to.

(Step S610-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the non-target special symbol is a jackpot symbol. As a result, if it is determined that the symbol is a jackpot symbol, the special symbol change waiting process is terminated, and if it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the process is moved to step S610-7.

(Step S610-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the non-target special symbol is a small hit symbol. As a result, if it is determined that the symbol is a small hit symbol, the special symbol change waiting process is terminated, and if it is determined that the symbol is not a small hit symbol, the process is moved to step S610-9.

(Step S610-9)
The main CPU 300a blocks-transfers the target hold stored in the first to fourth storage units of the special figure hold storage area corresponding to the target hold to a storage unit having a smaller ordinal number. Specifically, the object hold stored in the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit is transferred to the first storage unit to the third storage unit. Further, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and the target hold stored in the 1st storage unit is block-transferred to the 0th storage unit. In this special symbol storage area shift process, the counter value of the target special symbol hold ball count counter corresponding to the target hold is subtracted by "1", and the hold decrease indicates that the target hold is subtracted by "1". Set the specified command in the send buffer.

(Step S611)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol hit determination process for performing a large winning combination lottery. This special symbol hit detection process will be described later.

(Step S610-11)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol symbol determination process for determining the special symbol. Here, when the result of the big winning combination lottery in step S611 is a big hit or a small hit, the winning symbol random number and the hold type transferred to the 0th storage unit are loaded, and the corresponding winning symbol random number determination table or the small hit symbol is loaded. Select the random number judgment table, extract the special symbol judgment data, and save the extracted special symbol judgment data (type of jackpot symbol). If the result of the big winning combination lottery in step S611 is a loss, the special symbol determination data for the loss is saved. Then, after saving the special symbol determination data, the symbol type designation command corresponding to the special symbol determination data is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the special symbol determination data extracted in step S610-11. The first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162 are each composed of 7 segments, and each segment constituting the 7 segments is associated with a number (counter value). The special symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates the number (counter value) of the segment that is finally lit.

(Step S612)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol variation number determination process for determining the variation mode number and the variation pattern number. The details of this special symbol variation number determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-15)
The main CPU 300a loads the fluctuation mode number and the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S612, and determines the fluctuation time 1 and the fluctuation time 2 with reference to the fluctuation time determination table. Then, the total time of the determined fluctuation times 1 and 2 is set in the special symbol fluctuation timer.

(Step S610-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the result of the big win lottery is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, loads the special symbol determination data saved in step S610-11 and confirms the type of the big hit symbol. do. Then, with reference to the game state setting table and the current game state, the game state, the high probability number, and the time reduction number set after the end of the big role game are determined, and the determination result is used as the special symbol probability state reserve flag and the time reduction state reserve. Save to the flag, high-probability number-cutting spare counter, and time-saving number-cutting spare counter. If the lost symbol is saved, the process proceeds to the next process without executing the process.

(Step S610-19)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a special symbol display symbol counter in the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 in order to start the variable display of the special symbol. A counter value is associated with each segment of the 7-segments constituting the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162, and the segment corresponding to the counter value set in the special symbol display symbol counter is Lighting is controlled. Here, the counter value corresponding to the segment to be turned on at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is set in the special symbol display symbol counter. The special symbol display symbol counter is provided separately with a special symbol 1 display symbol counter corresponding to the first special symbol display 160 and a special symbol 2 display symbol counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 162. Here, the counter value is set in the counter corresponding to the hold type.

(Step S613)
The main CPU 300a executes the count-cutting management process. Here, processing is performed to end the time-saving game state according to the number of fluctuations. This number-cutting management process will be described later.

(Step S610-21)
The main CPU 300a sets a number-of-times command indicating the remaining number of times (actual remaining number of times) until the high-accuracy number of times and the time-saving number of times become 0 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-23)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state change designation command indicating the game state at the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

(Step S610-25)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H" and ends the special symbol change waiting process.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating the special symbol collision determination process (S611) according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S611-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol probability state flag.

(Step S611-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered set value of the set value buffer.

(Step S611-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the registration set value loaded in step S611-3 is within the normal range. As a result, if it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the process is transferred to step S611-11, and if it is determined that the value is not within the normal range, the process is transferred to step S611-7.

(Step S611-7)
The main CPU 300a sets 03H (setting abnormal state) in the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S611-9)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting abnormality state command (subcommand) in the transmission buffer, and ends the special symbol hit determination process. When this setting abnormality state command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330, a notification indicating that the setting is abnormal is made.

(Step S611-11)
The main CPU 300a refers to the jackpot determination random number determination table corresponding to the information loaded in step S611-1 and step S611-3, and sets the lower limit value and the upper limit value when determining a jackpot or a small hit, respectively.

(Step S611-13)
The main CPU 300a compares the big hit determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit with the above lower limit value and upper limit value, and performs a determination process (big win lottery) for determining whether or not a big hit or a small hit has been won.

(Step S611-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the non-target special symbol is a jackpot symbol. As a result, if it is determined that the symbol is a jackpot symbol, the process is transferred to step S611-17, and if it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the process is transferred to step S611-21.

(Step S611-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the large winning combination lottery result in step S611-13 is a small hit or a loss. As a result, if it is determined that there is a small hit or a loss, the process is transferred to step S611-21, and if it is determined that there is no small hit or loss, the process is transferred to step S611-19.

(Step S611-19)
The main CPU 300a changes the result of the large winning combination lottery in step S611-13 to a loss.

(Step S611-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the result of the determination process in step S611-13 or the result changed in step S611-19 as determination information, and ends the special symbol hit determination process.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol variation number determination process (step S612) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S612-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big winning combination lottery in step S611 is a big hit or a small hit. As a result, if it is determined that it is a big hit or a small hit, the process is moved to step S612-3, and if it is determined that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit (it is a loss), the process is performed in step S612-5. Transfer.

(Step S612-3)
The main CPU 300a sets a reach mode determination random number determination table corresponding to the current gaming state and the hold type.

(Step S612-5)
The main CPU 300a confirms the counter value of the special symbol 2 hold ball count counter when the hold type of the read hold is the special 2 hold, and when the hold type of the read hold is the special 1 hold, the main CPU 300a confirms the counter value. Special symbol 1 Check the counter value of the reserved ball count counter.

(Step S612-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the corresponding reach group determination random number determination table based on the current gaming state, the number of holds confirmed in step S612-5, and the hold type. Then, the reach group (group type) is determined based on the set reach group determination random number determination table and the reach group determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-9.

(Step S612-9)
The main CPU 300a sets a random number determination table for determining the reach mode at the time of loss corresponding to the group type determined in step S612-7.

(Step S612-11)
The main CPU 300a has a variable mode based on the reach mode determination random number determination table set in step S612-3 or step S612-9 and the reach mode determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-9. Determine the number. Further, here, the fluctuation pattern random number determination table is determined together with the fluctuation mode number.

(Step S612-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the variable mode command corresponding to the variable mode number determined in step S612-11 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S612-15)
The main CPU 300a determines the variation pattern number based on the variation pattern random number determination table determined in step S612-11 and the variation pattern random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-9.

(Step S612-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number determined in step S612-15 in the transmission buffer, and ends the special symbol variation number determination process.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating a number-of-times cutting management process (step S613) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S613-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the number of time reductions, that is, the counter value of the time reduction count cut counter is larger than 0. As a result, if it is determined that the number of time reductions is larger than 0, the process is moved to step S613-3, and if it is determined that the number of time reductions is 0, the number cut management process is terminated.

(Step S613-3)
The main CPU 300a decrements the time reduction counter.

(Step S613-5)
The main CPU 300a determines in step S613-3 whether the counter value (number of time reductions) has been updated to 0. As a result, if it is determined that the number of time reductions is 0, the process is moved to step S613-7, and if it is determined that the number of time reductions is not 0, the number cut management process is terminated.

(Step S613-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the time saving state flag in order to set the normal gaming state to the non-time saving gaming state. As a result, after the normal gaming state is set to the reduced working hours game state, the normal gaming state is changed to the non-short working hours gaming state at the start of the fluctuation when the number of fluctuations reaches the reduced working hours (50 or 100 times in this case). The Rukoto. For example, if it is set to the high probability precursor state, it will be set to the highest advantage state.

(Step S613-9)
The main CPU 300a turns on the time saving end flag and ends the number-of-times cut management process.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating a process during special symbol change in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S620-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the suspended flag is on. As will be described in detail later, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 during the variable display of the symbol on the first special symbol display 160. In this case, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, the small hit game is executed, but during this time, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 160 is interrupted. After the small hit game is completed, the variable display of the symbol on the first special symbol display 160 is restarted. The suspended flag is turned on when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162 and the symbol is being displayed on the first special symbol display 160. Here, if it is determined that the suspended flag is on, the processing during the special symbol change is terminated, and if it is determined that the suspended flag is not on, the process is moved to step S620-3.

(Step S620-3)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of updating the special symbol fluctuation base counter. The counter value of the special symbol fluctuation base counter is set so as to make one round in a predetermined cycle (for example, 100 ms). Specifically, when the counter value of the special symbol fluctuation base counter is "0", a predetermined counter value (for example, 25) is set, and when the counter value is "1" or more, it is set. The counter value is updated to the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current counter value.

(Step S620-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter updated in step S620-3 is “0”. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the process is transferred to step S620-7, and if the counter value is not "0", the process is transferred to step S620-11.

(Step S620-7)
The main CPU 300a performs a special symbol variation timer update process of subtracting a predetermined value from the timer value of the special symbol variation timer set in step S610-15.

(Step S620-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special symbol variation timer updated in step S620-7 is "0". As a result, if the timer value is "0", the process is transferred to step S620-17, and if the timer value is not "0", the process is transferred to step S620-11.

(Step S620-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special symbol display timer that measures the lighting time of each segment of the 7-segments constituting the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162. Specifically, when the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and when the timer value is "1" or more, the current timer value is used. "1" Updates the timer value to the subtracted value.

(Step S620-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", the process is shifted to step S620-15, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is not "0", the process is concerned. Ends processing during special symbol change.

(Step S620-15)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special symbol display symbol counter to be updated, and ends the processing during the special symbol change. As a result, each segment constituting the 7-segment is turned on in sequence at predetermined time intervals.

(Step S620-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the non-target special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. As a result, when it is determined that the non-target special symbol is in the variable display, the process is transferred to step S621, and when it is determined that the non-target special symbol is not in the variable display, the process is transferred to step S620-19.

(Step S621)
The main CPU 300a executes the symbol forced stop process. This symbol forced stop process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

(Step S620-19)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "02H".

(Step S620-21)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in step S610-13 in the target special symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162.

(Step S620-23)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a special symbol stop designation command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162.

(Step S620-25)
The main CPU 300a sets the special symbol change stop time, which is the time for stopping and displaying the special symbol, in the special game timer, and ends the processing during the special symbol change.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating a symbol forced stop process (step S621) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S621-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol during the stop display (corresponding) is a small hit symbol. As a result, if it is determined that the symbol is a small hit symbol, the process is transferred to step S621-3, and if it is determined that the symbol is not a small hit symbol, the process is transferred to step S621-11.

(Step S621-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game special symbol determination flag is 00H, that is, whether the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160. As a result, if it is determined that the special game special symbol determination flag is 00H, the process is transferred to step S621-11, and if it is determined that the special game special symbol determination flag is not 00H, the process is performed in step S621-5. To move.

(Step S621-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special symbol in the variable display (the other) is a jackpot symbol. As a result, if it is determined that the symbol is a jackpot symbol, the process is transferred to step S621-11, and if it is determined that the symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the process is transferred to step S621-7.

(Step S621-7)
The main CPU 300a turns on the suspended flag.

(Step S621-9)
The main CPU 300a executes a fluctuation interruption process for interrupting the variation display of the special symbol, and ends the symbol forced stop process. Here, a process is performed in which the remaining time of the fluctuation time and the information related to the special symbol are temporarily saved in a predetermined storage area.

(Step S621-11)
The main CPU 300a forcibly stops the lost symbol on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 on which the symbol is variablely displayed, and forcibly terminates the remaining variable time. The process of turning on the stop flag is performed, and the process of forcibly stopping the symbol is terminated.

By the above processing, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160, the lost symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162. Further, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, the first special symbol is displayed if the big hit symbol is finally stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 during the variable display. A lost symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed on the vessel 160. On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 162, the small hit symbol or the lost symbol is finally stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160. 1 The variable display on the special symbol display 160 will be temporarily interrupted.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol stop symbol display process on the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S630-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer set in step S620-25 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the special symbol stop symbol display process is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the special symbol stop symbol display process is terminated. The process is transferred to step S630-3.

(Step S630-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the variable time special stop flag is on. As a result, if it is determined that the variable time special stop flag is on, the process is moved to step S630-5, and if it is determined that the variable time special stop flag is not on, the special symbol stop symbol display process is terminated. do.

(Step S630-5)
The main CPU 300a confirms the result of the big winning combination lottery.

(Step S630-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big winning combination lottery is a loss. As a result, if it is determined that there is a loss, the process is transferred to step S630-27, and if it is determined that there is no loss, the process is transferred to step S630-9.

(Step S630-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a game state update process for updating the game state. Here, the game state is set to the initial state when the special symbol displayed in the stop display is the jackpot symbol, and when the special symbol displayed in the stop display is the small hit symbol, the process proceeds to the next process as it is.

(Step S630-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the data of the special electric accessory operating ram set table according to the type of the determined special symbol. The main CPU 300a is turned off when the variable time special stop flag is on.

(Step S630-13)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of setting the maximum number of operations of the special electric accessory. Specifically, referring to the data set in step S630-11, a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol = number of rounds) is set as a counter value in the special electric accessory maximum operation count counter. .. It should be noted that this special electric accessory maximum operation number counter indicates the number of rounds that can be executed in the large role game to be started from now on. On the other hand, the main RAM 300c is provided with a counter for the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory, and by adding "1" to the counter value of the counter for the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory at the start of each round game, the current counter value is added. The number of round games is managed. Here, with the start of the big role game, the process of resetting (updating to "0") the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter is also executed.

(Step S630-15)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data set in step S630-11, and saves a predetermined opening time as a timer value in the special electric accessory game timer.

(Step S630-17)
The main CPU 300a sets an opening designation command for transmitting the start of the major game to the sub-control board 330 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S630-19)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric accessory game management phase to "01H" when starting a large role game, and updates the special electric accessory game management phase to "05H" when starting a small hit game. ..

(Step S630-21)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H".

(Step S630-23)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special electric accessory game management phase updated in step S630-19 is "01H", that is, whether it is a big hit. As a result, when it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase is "01H", the process is moved to step S630-25, and when it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase is not "01H", the process is transferred to step S630-25. , Step S630-27.

(Step S630-25)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output start process for outputting a jackpot signal from the game information output terminal plate 312, and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. By this processing, a big hit signal is output with the start of the big role game (opening). Although a plurality of signals output from the game information output terminal board 312 are provided, only a predetermined jackpot signal will be described here.

(Step S630-27)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a command for confirming the game state when the special symbol is confirmed, which indicates the game state when the special symbol is confirmed.

(Step S630-29)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the time saving end flag is turned on. As described above, the time saving end flag is turned on in step S613-9 of FIG. 40 at the start of the fluctuation when the time saving gaming state is changed to the non-time saving gaming state. That is, when the time saving end flag is turned on here, the normal gaming state is changed from the time saving gaming state to the non-time saving gaming state due to the time saving omission at the start of the 50th or 100th fluctuation in the high probability precursor state. If it is done. That is, here, it is determined that the time reduction end flag is turned on only when the fluctuation at the time of the reduction of working hours ends. If it is determined that the time saving end flag is on, the process is transferred to step S630-31, and if it is determined that the time saving end flag is not turned on, the process is transferred to step S630-35.

(Step S630-31)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output stop process for stopping the jackpot signal output from the game information output terminal plate 312. That is, the jackpot signal is output during the big role game or the time-saving game state.

(Step S630-33)
The main CPU 300a turns off the time saving end flag.

(Step S630-35)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating a special electric accessory game management process (step S700) on the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S700-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special electric accessory game management phase.

(Step S700-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special electric accessory game management phase loaded in step S700-1 is "00H". That is, here, it is determined whether or not the player is currently in the big role game and the small hit game. If it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase is "00H", the special electric accessory game management process is terminated, and if it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase is not "00H", a step is taken. The process is transferred to S700-5.

(Step S700-5)
The main CPU 300a selects the special electric accessory game control module corresponding to the special electric accessory game management phase loaded in step S700-1.

(Step S700-7)
The main CPU 300a calls the special electric accessory game control module selected in step S700-5 to start the process.

(Step S700-9)
The main CPU 300a loads the special electric accessory game timer that manages the control time of the special electric accessory game, and ends the special electric accessory game management process.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This large winning opening pre-opening process is executed when the special electric accessory game management phase is "01H" or "05H".

(Step S710-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer set in step S630-15 or the like is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer is not "0", the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening is terminated, and the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer is "0". If it is determined, the process is moved to step S710-3.

(Step S710-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S710-5)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a command for designating the opening of the large winning opening to transmit the opening start of the large winning opening (start of the round game) to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S711)
The main CPU 300a executes a large winning opening opening / closing switching process. This large winning opening opening / closing switching process will be described later.

(Step S710-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric accessory game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value (“02H” or “06H”), and ends the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating a large winning opening opening / closing switching process (S711) in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S711-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter is the upper limit value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching number (the number of opening / closing of the large winning opening during one round game). As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the large winning opening opening / closing switching process is terminated, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process is moved to step S711-3.

(Step S711-3)
The main CPU 300a energizes the first special winning opening solenoid 126c and the second winning opening solenoid 128c based on the counter value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter with reference to the data of the special electric accessory operating ram set table. The solenoid control data for control and the timer data which is the energization time or the energization stop time are extracted.

(Step S711-5)
Based on the solenoid control data extracted in step S711-3, the main CPU 300a starts or stops energization of the first special winning opening solenoid 126c or the second special winning opening solenoid 128c. Executes the winning port solenoid energization control process. By executing the large winning opening solenoid energization control process, the energization start or energization stop of the first special winning opening solenoid 126c or the second special winning opening solenoid 128c is controlled in steps S400-33 and S400-35. It will be.

(Step S711-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S711-3 in the special electric accessory game timer. It should be noted that the timer value saved in the special electric accessory game timer here is the maximum opening time of one large winning opening.

(Step S711-9)
The main CPU 300a is in the energization start state of the first special winning opening solenoid 126c or the second special winning opening solenoid 128c, that is, in step S711-5, the first special winning opening solenoid 126c or the second special winning opening solenoid 128c Determine if the control process to start energization has been performed. As a result, if it is determined that the energization start state is determined, the process is moved to step S711-11, and if it is determined that the energization start state is not present, the large winning opening opening / closing switching process is terminated.

(Step S711-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value, and ends the large winning opening opening / closing switching process.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating a large winning opening opening control process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This large winning opening opening control process is executed when the special electric accessory game management phase is "02H" or "06H".

(Step S720-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer saved in step S711-7 is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer is not "0", the process is shifted to step S720-5, and it is determined that the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer is "0". If so, the process is moved to step S720-3.

(Step S720-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching number counter is the upper limit value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching number. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S720-7, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S711.

(Step S711)
If it is determined in step S720-3 that the counter value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter is not the upper limit value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching count, the main CPU 300a executes the process of step S711. do.

(Step S720-5)
In the main CPU 300a, the counter value of the large winning opening winning ball number counter updated in step S500-9 has not reached the specified number, that is, the number of large winning openings is the same as the maximum number of winning balls in one round. It is determined whether or not the game ball of is entered. As a result, if it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the large winning opening opening control process is terminated, and if it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process is moved to step S720-7.

(Step S720-7)
The main CPU 300a executes the large winning opening closing process necessary for stopping the energization of the first large winning opening solenoid 126c or the second special winning opening solenoid 128c to close the large winning opening. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed.

(Step S720-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the winning opening closing effective time (interval time) in the special electric accessory game timer.

(Step S720-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric accessory game management phase to a value (“03H” or “07H”) obtained by adding 01H to the current value.

(Step S720-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a command for designating the closing of the winning opening to indicate that the winning opening has been closed in the transmission buffer, and ends the large winning opening opening control process.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating a large winning opening closing effective process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This large winning opening closing effective process is executed when the special electric accessory game management phase is "03H" or "07H".

(Step S730-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer saved in step S720-9 is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer is not "0", the large winning opening closing effective process is terminated, and the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer is "0". If it is determined, the process is moved to step S730-3.

(Step S730-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation count counter matches the counter value of the special electric accessory maximum operation count counter, that is, whether the round game of the preset number of times is completed. .. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation count counter matches the counter value of the special electric accessory maximum operation count counter, the process is transferred to step S730-9, and when it is determined that they do not match. The process is transferred to step S730-5.

(Step S730-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric accessory game management phase to "01H". When the special electric accessory game management phase is 07H, that is, during the control of the small hit game, the number of round games of the small hit game is "1", so that the answer is always YES in step S730-3. It is determined and the process does not shift to the step.

(Step S730-7)
The main CPU 300a saves a predetermined large winning opening closing time in the special game timer, and ends the large winning opening closing valid process. As a result, the next round game will be started.

(Step S730-9)
The main CPU 300a executes an ending time setting process for saving the ending time in the special electric accessory game timer.

(Step S730-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric accessory game management phase to a value (“04H” or “08H”) obtained by adding 01H to the current value.

(Step S730-13)
The main CPU 300a sets an ending designation command indicating the start of the ending in the transmission buffer, and ends the large winning opening closing valid processing.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating a large winning opening end wait process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This large winning opening end wait process is executed when the special electric accessory game management phase is "04H" or "08H".

(Step S740-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer saved in step S730-9 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer is not "0", the large winning opening end wait process is terminated, and the timer value of the special electric accessory game timer is "0". If it is determined, the process is moved to step S740-3.

(Step S740-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special electric accessory game management phase is "08H", that is, whether the small hit game is finished. As a result, when it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase is "08H", the process is moved to step S740-11, and when it is determined that the special electric accessory game management phase is not "08H", the process is transferred to step S740-11. The process is transferred to step S740-5.

(Step S740-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a state setting process for setting the game state after the end of the major game. Here, the game state, the high probability number, and the time reduction number set in the spare area in step S610-17 are loaded, and each flag is set and the counter value is set as the game state after the big role game.

(Step S740-7)
In step S740-5, the main CPU 300a determines whether the normal gaming state is set to the non-time saving gaming state. As a result, if it is determined that the non-time saving game state is set, the process is transferred to step S740-9, and if it is determined that the non-time saving game state is not set, the process is transferred to step S740-21.

(Step S740-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output stop process for stopping the jackpot signal output from the game information output terminal plate 312. That is, when the maximum advantage state is set after the big role game, the output of the big hit signal is stopped at the end of the big role game.

(Step S740-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the current gaming state is a high-probability precursor state (high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state). As a result, if it is determined that the state is a high probability precursor state, the process is transferred to step S740-13, and if it is determined that the state is not a high probability precursor state, the process is transferred to step S740-21.

(Step S740-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the stop-displayed small hit symbol is the special symbol Z1. As a result, if it is determined that it is the special symbol Z1, the process is transferred to step S740-15, and if it is determined that it is not the special symbol Z1, the process is transferred to step S740-21.

(Step S740-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the time saving state flag in order to change the normal gaming state to the non-time saving gaming state. As a result, when the special symbol Z1 is determined in the high probability precursor state, the game state is changed to the most dominant state at the end of the small hit game.

(Step S740-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a counter reset process for resetting the time reduction counter.

(Step S740-19)
The main CPU 300a performs a jackpot signal output stop process for stopping the jackpot signal output from the game information output terminal plate 312. That is, when the special symbol Z1 is won and the most dominant state is set after the small hit game, the output of the big hit signal is stopped at the end of the small hit game.

(Step S740-21)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state change designation command for transmitting a game state set after the end of the major game.

(Step S740-23)
The main CPU 300a sets the number-of-times commands corresponding to the high-accuracy number of times and the time-saving number of times in the transmission buffer.

(Step S740-25)
The main CPU 300a updates the special electric accessory game management phase to "00H" and ends the special winning opening end wait process. As a result, when the special 1 hold or the special 2 hold is stored, the variable display of the symbol is restarted.

FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating a normal game management phase according to a reference example of simultaneous rotation. As described above, in the simultaneous rotation reference example, the process related to the normal game triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 124 or the entry of the game ball into the normal drawing operating port 125 is repeated stepwise and repeatedly. Although it is executed, the main control board 300 manages each process related to such a normal game by the normal game management phase.

As shown in FIG. 50, a plurality of normal game control modules for executing and controlling normal games are stored in the main ROM 300b, and a normal game management phase is associated with each of these normal game control modules. .. Specifically, when the normal game management phase is "00H", the module for executing the "normal symbol change waiting process" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "01H", the module is called. When the module for executing "normal symbol change processing" is called and the normal game management phase is "02H", the module for executing "normal symbol stop symbol display processing" is called and normal. When the game management phase is "03H", the module for executing "pre-processing for opening the winning opening of the normal electric accessory" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "04H", "normal". When the module for executing the "electric accessory winning opening opening control process" is called and the normal game management phase is "05H", the module for executing the "normal electric accessory winning opening closing effective processing" Is called, and when the normal game management phase is "06H", the module for executing the "normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process" is called.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating a normal game management process (step S800) on the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S800-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the normal game management phase.

(Step S800-3)
The main CPU 300a selects the normal game control module corresponding to the normal game management phase loaded in step S800-1.

(Step S800-5)
The main CPU 300a calls the normal game control module selected in step S800-3 to start the process.

(Step S800-7)
The main CPU 300a loads a normal game timer that manages the control time of the normal game.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating a normal symbol change waiting process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal symbol change waiting process is executed when the normal game management phase is "00H".

(Step S810-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter, and determines whether the counter value is "0", that is, whether the normal symbol hold is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is "0", the normal symbol change waiting process is terminated, and when it is determined that the counter value is not "0", the process is moved to step S810-3.

(Step S810-3)
The main CPU 300a blocks-transfers the normal figure hold (hit-determined random number) stored in the first to fourth storage units of the normal figure hold storage area to a storage unit having a smaller ordinal number. Specifically, the normal figure hold stored in the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit is transferred to the first storage unit to the third storage unit. Further, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and the normal drawing hold stored in the 1st storage unit is transferred to the 0th storage unit. In this normal symbol storage area shift process, the counter value of the normal symbol hold ball counter is subtracted by "1", and a normal symbol hold reduction specification command indicating that the normal symbol hold is subtracted by "1" is transmitted. Set in the buffer.

(Step S810-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the hit determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit, selects the hit determination random number determination table corresponding to the current gaming state, performs a general drawing lottery, and stores the lottery result. Execute the judgment process.

(Step S810-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery in step S810-5. In the simultaneous rotation reference example, the normal symbol display 168 is composed of one LED lamp, and the normal symbol display 168 is turned on in the case of a hit, and the normal symbol display 168 is turned off in the case of a loss. Let me. The normal symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates whether or not to finally turn on the normal symbol display 168. For example, if a winner is won, the normal symbol stop symbol number is "0". Is determined, and in the case of loss, "1" is determined as the normal symbol stop symbol number.

(Step S810-9)
The main CPU 300a confirms the current gaming state, selects and sets the corresponding normal symbol variation time data table.

(Step S810-11)
The main CPU 300a determines the normal symbol fluctuation time based on the hit determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S810-3 and the normal symbol fluctuation time data table set in step S810-9.

(Step S810-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol fluctuation time determined in step S810-11 in the normal game timer.

(Step S810-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a normal symbol display symbol counter in the normal symbol display 168 in order to start a variable display of the normal symbol. When, for example, "0" is set as the counter value in the normal symbol display symbol counter, the normal symbol display 168 is lit and controlled, and when "1" is set as the counter value, the normal symbol display is displayed. The device 168 is turned off. Here, a predetermined counter value is set in the normal symbol display symbol counter at the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol.

(Step S810-17)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a command for designating the hold of the normal figure, which indicates the number of hold of the normal figure stored in the hold storage area of the normal figure.

(Step S810-19)
The main CPU 300a transmits a normal symbol designation command based on the normal symbol stop symbol number determined in step S810-7, that is, the symbol type (win symbol or lost symbol) determined by the normal symbol hit determination process. Set to.

(Step S810-21)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "01H" and ends the normal symbol change waiting process.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating a process during normal symbol variation in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal symbol change processing is executed when the normal game management phase is "01H".

(Step S820-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S810-13 is "0". As a result, if the timer value is "0", the process is transferred to step S820-9, and if the timer value is not "0", the process is transferred to step S820-3.

(Step S820-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal symbol display timer that measures the lighting time and the extinguishing time of the normal symbol display 168. Specifically, when the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and when the timer value is "1" or more, the current timer value is used. "1" Updates the timer value to the subtracted value.

(Step S820-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", the process is shifted to step S820-7, and when it is determined that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is not "0", the process is concerned. Ends processing during normal symbol change.

(Step S820-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter. Here, if the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter is a counter value indicating that the normal symbol display 168 is turned off, it is updated to a counter value indicating lighting, and a counter value indicating lighting of the normal symbol display 168 is updated. If is, the counter value indicating that the light is turned off is updated, and the processing during the change of the normal symbol is terminated. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 repeatedly turns on and off (blinks) at predetermined time intervals over the normal symbol fluctuation time.

(Step S820-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in step S810-7 above in the normal symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 is finally controlled to be turned on or off, and the result of the normal symbol lottery is notified.

(Step S820-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal symbol fluctuation stop time, which is the time for stopping and displaying the normal symbol, in the normal game timer.

(Step S820-13)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a command for specifying the stop of the normal symbol, which indicates that the stop display of the normal symbol has started.

(Step S820-15)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "02H" and ends the normal symbol changing process.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating a normal symbol stop symbol display process on the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal symbol stop symbol display process is executed when the normal game management phase is "02H".

(Step S830-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer set in step S820-11 is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal symbol stop symbol display process is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the timer value is determined to be "0". The process is transferred to step S830-3.

(Step S830-3)
The main CPU 300a confirms the result of the drawing lottery.

(Step S830-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the result of the general drawing lottery is a hit. As a result, if it is determined that it is a hit, the process is transferred to step S830-9, and if it is determined that it is not a hit (it is a loss), the process is transferred to step S830-7.

(Step S830-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and ends the normal symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, when the normal game management process based on the normal figure hold of 1 is completed and the normal figure hold is stored, the process for starting the variable display of the normal symbol based on the next hold is performed. It becomes.

(Step S830-9)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the open / close control pattern table, and saves the time before the opening of the normal power as a timer value in the normal game timer.

(Step S830-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "03H" and ends the normal symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, the opening / closing control of the first variable starting port 120B is started.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating the pre-opening process of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal electric accessory winning opening pre-opening process is executed when the normal game management phase is "03H".

(Step S840-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer set in step S830-9 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the pre-processing for opening the winning opening of the normal electric accessory is terminated, and it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0". In that case, the process is moved to step S841.

(Step S841)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process. This ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process will be described later.

(Step S840-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "04H" and ends the pre-opening process of the normal electric accessory winning opening.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating a process of switching the opening / closing of the winning opening of the ordinary electric accessory in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example.

(Step S841-1)
In the main CPU 300a, the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter is the upper limit of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count (the number of times the movable piece 120b of the first variable starting port 120B is opened / closed during one opening / closing control). Determine if there is. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the opening / closing switching process of the ordinary electric accessory winning opening is terminated, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process is performed in step S841-3. Transfer.

(Step S841-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the open / close control pattern table, and based on the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter, the solenoid control data (energization control data or energization control data) for energizing the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c. Stop control data) and timer data that is the energization time (solenoid energization time) or energization stop time (normal power closing effective time = pause time) of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c are extracted.

(Step S841-5)
The main CPU 300a starts energizing the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c based on the solenoid control data extracted in step S841-3, or stops energization of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c. The object solenoid energization control process is executed. By executing this ordinary electric accessory solenoid energization control process, the energization start or energization stop of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c is controlled in steps S400-33 and S400-35.

(Step S841-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S841-3 in the normal game timer. The timer value saved in the normal game timer here is the maximum opening time of the first variable start port 120B once.

(Step S841-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the energization start state of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c is performed, that is, whether the control process for starting the energization of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c is performed in step S841-5. As a result, when it is determined that the energization start state is determined, the process is moved to step S841-11, and when it is determined that the energization start state is not in the energization start state, the normal electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process is terminated.

(Step S841-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating a normal electric accessory winning opening opening control process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening control process is executed when the ordinary game management phase is "04H".

(Step S850-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S841-7 is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the process is shifted to step S850-5, and if it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", step S850 Move the process to -3.

(Step S850-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching number counter is the upper limit value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching number. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S850-7, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S841.

(Step S841)
If it is determined in step S850-3 that the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count is not the upper limit of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count, the main CPU 300a executes the process of step S841. do.

(Step S850-5)
The main CPU 300a has not reached the specified number of counter values of the ordinary electric accessory winning ball number counter updated in step S530-9, that is, the first variable starting port 120B is being controlled to open and close once. It is determined whether or not the same number of game balls as the maximum number of winning balls can be entered. As a result, if it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the normal electric accessory winning opening opening control process is terminated, and if it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process is moved to step S850-7.

(Step S850-7)
The main CPU 300a executes the ordinary electric accessory closing process necessary for stopping the energization of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 120c and closing the first variable starting port 120B. As a result, the first variable starting port 120B is closed.

(Step S850-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal power effective state time in the normal game timer.

(Step S850-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "05H" and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening opening control process.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating an ordinary electric accessory winning opening closing effective process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal electric accessory winning opening closing effective process is executed when the normal game management phase is "05H".

(Step S860-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S850-9 is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory winning opening closing effective process is terminated, and it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0". In the case, the process is moved to step S860-3.

(Step S860-3)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal game end wait time in the normal game timer.

(Step S860-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "06H" and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening closing effective process.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating a normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process in the main control board 300 according to the simultaneous rotation reference example. This normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process is executed when the normal game management phase is "06H".

(Step S870-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S860-3 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process is terminated, and it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0". In the case, the process is moved to step S870-3.

(Step S870-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process. As a result, when the normal symbol hold is stored, the variable display of the normal symbol is restarted. Next, as a reference example of the production, a specific production that can be executed by the above-mentioned type 1 gaming machine, a type 2 gaming machine, and a simultaneous turning machine, and specific processing related to the production will be described.

<Reference example of production>
FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation effect of a reachless variation pattern according to an effect reference example. As described above, when the big winning combination lottery is performed on the main control board 300, the variable effect of notifying the result of the big winning combination lottery is executed during the variable display of the special symbol, that is, over the variable time of the special symbol. In this variable effect, various background images are displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, and the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed superimposed on the background image. During the variable effect, the sound is output from the sound output device 206 along with the image displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, the effect lighting device 204 is lit, and the effect accessory device 202 is used. Although it is movably controlled, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The variation effect according to the production reference example is roughly classified into a reach-less variation pattern and a reach variation pattern. In the variation effect of the non-reach variation pattern, a background image (not shown) is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, and the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are superimposed and displayed on the background image. For example, as shown in FIG. 60A, it is assumed that the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the result of the large winning combination lottery was lost. In this state, when a new variable display of the special symbol is performed, the three effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are variablely displayed as shown in FIG. 60 (b) with the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Start (scroll display). The downward white arrows in the figure indicate that the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are scrolled in the height direction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the effect symbol 210a is first stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 60 (d), the effect symbol 210c different from the effect symbol 210a is stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (e), at substantially the same timing as when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162. , The effect symbol 210b is stopped and displayed, and the player is notified of the big winning combination lottery result by the final stop display mode of the three effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c at this time.

FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern according to the effect reference example. In the production reference example, the reach fluctuation pattern is roughly classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern, a development reach fluctuation pattern, and a pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern. Similar to the variation effect of the non-reach variation pattern, the variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern starts the variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c with the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and the variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is started. As shown, the effect symbol 210a is first stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the same effect symbol 210c as the effect symbol 210a is stopped and displayed.

In this way, when the same effect symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in the reach mode in which the same effect symbols 210a and 210c are stopped and displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), the effect symbols are displayed on the main effect display unit 200a. "Reach" is displayed by superimposing on 210a and 210c. In addition, a plurality of types of reach modes are provided, and the same effect symbols 210a and 210c on which any number of "1" to "9" is written are stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (d), the shape of the effect symbols 210a and 210c is changed from the one before the reach mode, and the variable display is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (e), finally, the effect symbols 210b different from the effect symbols 210a and 210c are stopped and displayed, and the player is notified that the result of the big role lottery is lost.

FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation effect of the development reach fluctuation pattern at the time of loss according to the production reference example, and FIG. 63 is an example of a variation effect of the development reach variation pattern at the time of a jackpot according to the production reference example. It is a figure explaining. As shown in FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (d) and 63 (a) to (d), the variation effect of the development reach variation pattern is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a in the same manner as the variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern. The reach development effect is executed in which the effect symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in the reach mode, and then a predetermined development image (moving image) is reproduced and displayed. In this reach development effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62 (e) and 63 (e), the mission is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, and FIGS. 62 (f), (g) and 63 (g) As shown in f) and (g), an image for accomplishing the mission is displayed.

Here, the development image for the reach development production is roughly divided into a loss pattern and a jackpot pattern, and in the development image of the loss pattern, as shown in FIG. 62 (h), the image showing the failure of the mission is finally obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (i), the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are stopped and displayed in a combination for notifying the loss. On the other hand, in the developed image of the jackpot pattern, as shown in FIG. 63 (h), an image showing the success of the mission is finally displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 63 (i), the effect symbols 210a, 210b, The 210c is stopped and displayed in a combination that notifies the jackpot.

As described above, the reach development effect includes, for example, a mission effect in which a development image of the content that challenges the mission is displayed, and a battle effect in which a development image in which a ally character and an enemy character compete against each other is displayed. Has been done. The mission production is provided with a plurality of execution patterns having different mission contents, and the battle production is provided with a plurality of execution patterns having different appearance characters and battle methods. In addition, as described above, the execution pattern of the mission production is roughly divided into a jackpot pattern that achieves the mission and a loss pattern that fails the mission. Similarly, in the execution pattern of the battle production, the ally character is the enemy character. It is roughly divided into a jackpot pattern that wins the game and a loss pattern that the ally character loses to the enemy character.

The jackpot pattern and the loss pattern are composed of the same contents until the end of the production, and differ in that the ally character wins or loses in the end, or whether or not the mission is completed. .. Therefore, during the reach development effect, the player cannot identify the result of the big role lottery until the end of the variable effect, and the player is given a sense of expectation of a big hit.

The jackpot pattern is selected only when the result of the big win lottery is a big hit, and the loss pattern is selected only when the result of the big win lottery is a loss. However, in one variable effect, the reach development effect may be executed twice. In this case, the first reach development effect is executed in a loss pattern, and the second reach development effect is a loss pattern. Or it is executed in the jackpot pattern. The flow of the effect when the reach development effect is executed twice in one variable effect will be described below.

FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable effect when the reach development effect according to the effect reference example is executed twice. For example, it is assumed that after the effect symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in the reach mode, the mission effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b). Up to this point, there is no difference from the case where the reach development effect is executed only once in one variable effect, but as shown in FIG. 64 (c) immediately after being notified that the mission could not be achieved. , "REACH UP" is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (d), the development image for the battle effect is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, and the second reach development effect is started. In the development image for this battle production, the ally character and the enemy character play against each other, and when the jackpot is won, as shown in FIG. 64 (e), the ally character finally wins the enemy character and at the same time. , As shown in FIG. 64 (f), the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are stopped and displayed in a combination that notifies the jackpot. On the other hand, at the time of loss, as shown in FIG. 64 (g), the ally character is finally defeated by the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. 64 (h), the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c notify the loss. Stop display is displayed in combination.

FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation effect of a pseudo continuous reach variation pattern according to an effect reference example. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the variation effect of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern starts with the variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c, and as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the effect symbols 210a, The 210b and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in any one of a plurality of types of pseudo modes provided in advance. In this pseudo mode, for example, the same effect symbols 210a and 210b and the effect symbols 210c on which a number "2" larger than these effect symbols 210a and 210b are temporarily stopped and displayed.

When the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo manner, the variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is restarted as shown in FIG. 65 (c). That is, it can be said that the pseudo mode shows the re-variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c. After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed again in a pseudo manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), when the variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is resumed, the effect symbols 210a, 210c are displayed in the reach mode as shown in FIG. 65 (f). After that, as shown in FIGS. 65 (g) to 65 (i), the reach development effect is executed in the same manner as the development reach fluctuation pattern, and the result of the big role lottery is notified to the player.

As described above, in the variation effect of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern, the content until the effect symbols 210a and 210c are in the reach mode is different from the variation effect of the development reach variation pattern, and after the effect pattern is in the reach mode, it is developed. The fluctuation effect will proceed in the same manner as the reach fluctuation pattern.

In the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern, a plurality of variation display patterns of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c until the reach mode is reached are provided, and the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are temporarily stopped for each variation display pattern. The number of times of display, in other words, the number of times of variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is different. This variation display pattern is determined by the variation mode command, and as the number of temporary stop displays (variation display) of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c increases, there is a possibility that the winning of the jackpot will be finally notified (hereinafter, "reliability"). The selection ratio of the variable mode command at the time of winning a big hit and at the time of losing is set so that the degree) becomes high.

Specifically, when the result of the big role lottery is a big hit, the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a large number of variable impressions is set higher than the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a small number of variable impressions. If the result of the big win lottery is lost, the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a small number of variable display times is set higher than the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a large number of variable display times.

Further, in the main control board 300, the reliability of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern is set to be higher than the reliability of the development reach variation pattern. Therefore, the reliability is suggested by the number of temporary stop displays (variable display) of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c, and the player has more temporary stop displays (variable display) of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c. While expecting that it will be done, we will watch over the whereabouts of the production.

The execution pattern of the above-mentioned variation effect is determined and executed and controlled on the sub-control board 330 based on the variation command determined on the main control board 300. That is, it can be said that the execution pattern of the variation effect is determined in cooperation with the main control board 300 and the sub control board 330.

FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the variation effect determination table according to the effect reference example, FIG. 66 (a) shows the first half variation effect determination table, and FIG. 66 (b) shows the second half variation effect determination table. As described above, when the major winning combination lottery is performed on the main control board 300, variable commands are determined based on the result of the major winning combination lottery, and each determined command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. When the sub-control board 330 receives the variation mode command, it acquires an effect random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, and also refers to the first half variation effect determination table to obtain the acquired effect random number and the received variation mode command. Based on the above, the execution pattern of the variation effect in the first half is determined. Further, when the variation pattern command is received, 1 effect random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 249, and the latter half variation effect determination table is referred to, based on the acquired effect random number and the received variation pattern command. Determine the execution pattern of the fluctuation effect in the latter half. In FIG. 66, only a part of the first half variation effect determination table and the second half variation effect determination table is extracted and shown.

As shown in FIG. 66, according to the first half variation effect determination table, the selection ratio for the execution pattern of the first half variation effect is set for each variation mode number (variation mode command), and the latter half variation effect determination table is used. For example, for each variation pattern number (variation pattern command), a selection ratio for the execution pattern of the variation effect in the latter half is set. Then, by executing the determined execution patterns of the first half and the second half of the variation effect in combination, one variation effect is executed.

As for the variation effect of the non-reach variation pattern, "None" indicating that the variation effect of the first half is not executed is determined as the execution pattern of the first half, and "normal loss 1" corresponding to the variation pattern without reach is determined as the execution pattern of the second half. , "Normal loss 2", "Special loss 1", "Special loss 2" is executed when it is determined. For example, upon receiving the variation mode command corresponding to the variation mode number of "01H" indicating that the variation effect of the first half is not executed, the sub-control board 330 always determines "none" as the execution pattern of the first half. Further, at this time, as the fluctuation pattern command that can be received at the same time, only one of "normal loss 1", "normal loss 2", "special loss 1", and "special loss 2" is determined in the latter half. The selection ratio is set in the variable effect determination table. Therefore, "None" is determined as the execution pattern in the first half, and "Normal loss 1", "Normal loss 2", "Special loss 1", and "Special loss 2" are determined as the execution patterns in the second half. The execution pattern of the effect is determined by the above-mentioned non-reach variation pattern.

On the other hand, as the variation effect of the reach variation pattern, other than "None" was determined as the execution pattern in the first half, and one of the reach development effects (indicated by developments 1 to 5 in the figure) was determined as the execution pattern in the second half. If executed. In other words, when the variation effect of the reach variation pattern is executed in the main effect display unit 200a, the variation mode command corresponding to the variation mode number other than the variation mode number = 01H is always received and developed. It means that the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number in which any of 1 to 5 is determined is received.

Here, in FIG. 66A, in the first half execution patterns such as "normal reach 1" and "normal reach 2", among the variation effects of the normal reach variation pattern, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are the reach modes, respectively. More specifically, the background image displayed on the main effect display unit 200a and the variable display patterns of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c until the reach development effect is started are shown. These image patterns are pre-designed to match the time of the variation display of the special symbol associated with the variation mode number. For example, when "normal reach 1" is determined, FIGS. 61 (a) to 61 (a). The image shown in (d) is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a.

Further, in FIG. 66A, the “pseudo 2a” or the like in the execution pattern of the first half is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a until the reach development effect is started among the variation effects of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern. The display pattern of the main variation effect image, that is, the execution pattern of the symbol display effect in which the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are variablely displayed is shown. For example, "pseudo 2a" is a pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 2" in which the number of fluctuation display times of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is two, and the main variation effect image is the display pattern a. Shown. Further, the "pseudo 3b" is a pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern of the "pseudo 3" in which the number of fluctuation display times of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is three, and the main variation effect image is the display pattern b. Shown.

In the first half variation effect determination table and the second half variation effect determination table shown in FIG. 66, the variation effect of the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is executed only when the result of the big role lottery is lost. , The selection ratio is set. In addition, the development reach fluctuation pattern and the pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern are determined at both the time of loss and the jackpot, but the development reach fluctuation pattern has a higher selection ratio at the time of loss than the pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern and is a jackpot. The time selection ratio is set low. In this way, by setting the selection ratio between the time of loss and the time of big hit, the pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern is set to have higher reliability than the development reach fluctuation pattern.

Furthermore, among the pseudo continuous reach fluctuation patterns, the higher the number of pseudos, the higher the selection ratio at the time of jackpot, and the lower the selection ratio at the time of loss, and the greater the number of pseudos, the higher the reliability. Has been made.

As described above, the rough flow of the variable effect is determined by the variable effect determination table, but at the start of the variable effect, various elemental effects that compose the variable effect are based on the variable mode command or the variable pattern command. Executability and execution pattern are further determined. Here, the element effect is, for example, as described above, a variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c on the main effect display unit 200a, or a development image displayed on the main effect display unit 200a in the reach development effect. Furthermore, it refers to all the effects that constitute the variable effect, such as the effect of moving the effect accessory device 202. In the embodiment, the advance notice effect (suggestion effect) is executed at various timings during the variation effect as the element effect that constitutes the variation effect.

This notice effect is the main effect display unit 200a at the start of the variation effect, at the time of re-variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c in the variation effect of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern, and during the reach development effect. It is an effect of displaying a predetermined image on the screen or moving the effect accessory device 202 at a predetermined timing, and whether or not the effect can be executed and an execution pattern are determined for each advance notice effect. Each notice effect is provided with a plurality of types of execution patterns, and for each of the plurality of types of execution patterns, a selection ratio is set for each variation pattern command or variation mode command, in other words, for each jackpot winning or not. The expected value is set for each execution pattern according to the selection ratio.

As described above, when the sub-control board 330 receives the variation command, the execution pattern of the variation effect, whether or not each element effect can be executed, and the execution pattern are determined, and the variation effect is executed during the variation display of the special symbol. The Rukoto. As described above, the variation effect is performed once for each variation display of the special symbol, but in the embodiment, the effect straddling the variation display of the special symbol is also executed a plurality of times.

FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hold display effect according to an effect reference example. A hold display area 211 is provided below the main effect display unit 200a. Although not shown in FIGS. 60 to 65, the hold display area 211 is always displayed on the main effect display unit 200a even during the variation effect or the waiting for the game. Then, during the variable effect, the hold display effect is performed in the hold display area 211. In the hold display effect, the hold display 212a indicating the hold read in the processing area (0th storage unit) at the time of the large winning combination lottery is stored in the 1st to 4th storage units of the 1st special figure hold storage area. The first hold display 212b, the second hold display 212c, the third hold display 212d, and the fourth hold display 212e, which indicate the hold being held, are displayed in the hold display area 211. In the following, the hold display 212a and the first hold display 212b to the fourth hold display 212e are collectively referred to as the hold display 212.

For example, when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the main RAM 300c stores four special 1 hold, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), the hold display 212a and the first hold display are displayed. A total of five hold displays 212, 212b to the fourth hold display 212e, are displayed in the hold display area 211. Then, from this state, the variable display of the special symbol is completed, the special 1 hold stored in the first storage unit is read out to the processing area (0th storage unit), a large winning combination lottery is performed, and the main RAM 300c is performed. When the hold shift process of is executed, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the hold display 212a is erased, and the first hold display 212b to the fourth hold display 212e are moved and displayed one to the left. .. Further, when the next special 1 hold is read from this state, each hold display 212 is further moved and displayed as shown in FIG. 67 (c). As described above, the hold display effect is an effect of notifying the player of the special 1 hold number stored in the main RAM 300c.

Further, a plurality of display patterns of the hold display 212 are provided, and the display color is different for each display pattern. In the main control board 300, the acquisition time effect determination process (step S536) is executed when the hold is stored, and the variation information determined when the newly stored hold is read out to the 0th storage unit. A read-ahead designation command indicating is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. When the sub-control board 330 receives the look-ahead designation command, the display pattern of the hold display 212 corresponding to the newly stored hold is determined based on the receive command. At this time, the selection ratio of each display pattern is set for each look-ahead designation command, that is, for each variation information determined when the newly stored hold is read by the large winning combination lottery. That is, since the selection ratio of each display pattern is set according to whether or not the jackpot can be won and the execution pattern of the variable effect, the display pattern of the hold display 212 suggests the reliability (expected value) of the jackpot. It will be.

FIG. 68 (a) is a diagram for explaining the final hold display pattern determination table, and FIG. 68 (b) is a diagram for explaining the previous hold display pattern determination table. As described above, in the acquisition-time effect determination process on the main control board 300, the sub-control board 330 issues a look-ahead designation command indicating the fluctuation mode number and the fluctuation pattern number determined when the newly stored hold is read. Send to. That is, the look-ahead designation command is a command that transmits the variation mode number and the variation pattern number determined when the hold is read to the sub-control board 330. According to the final hold display pattern determination table, the selection ratio of the display pattern of the hold display 212 is set for each look-ahead designation command (variable pattern number), and when the look-ahead designation command is received, the final hold display 212 is set. The display pattern, that is, the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined.

According to the final hold display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 (a), "default (white)", "blinking", "blue", "yellow", "green", "black", "red", and "premier (premier) One of the eight types of display patterns of "rainbow)" is determined. Then, when the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined, the display pattern of the hold display 212 displayed before that is referred to the previous hold display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 (b). Will be decided. According to the previous hold display pattern determination table, the selection ratio of the display pattern of the hold display 212 to be displayed before the movement display is set for each display pattern of the hold display 212.

For example, in the main control board 300, when the hold is stored in the second storage unit of the first special figure hold storage area, the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is referred to by referring to the final hold display pattern determination table. Is decided. In this case, next, the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined with reference to the previous hold display pattern determination table. At this time, the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined based on the final display pattern of the hold display 212a determined earlier. For example, when the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is "blue", according to the previous hold display pattern determination table, "blinking" is 200/250 as the display pattern of the first hold display 212b. Is determined by the probability of, and "blue" is determined by the probability of 50/250.

When the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined in this way, the previous hold display pattern determination table is again set based on the previously determined display pattern of the first hold display 212b. With reference to this, the display pattern of the second hold display 212c is determined.

As described above, when the hold is stored, the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is first determined, and then the first hold is determined based on the determined final display pattern of the hold display 212a. The display patterns are sequentially determined so as to go back in the reverse direction of the display order, such as the display pattern of the display 212b being determined. According to the previous hold display pattern determination table, the selection ratio is set so that only the display pattern that is the same as the previously determined display pattern of the hold display 212 or has low reliability is determined. Has been done.

As described above, in the hold display effect, the hold display 212 is provided with a plurality of display patterns having different expected values for granting a predetermined game profit. Then, the hold display 212 may be displayed in the display pattern of 1 from the time when it is first displayed on the main effect display unit 200a until it is finally erased, or the display pattern changes during the display period. In some cases.

In the production reference example, the timing at which the display pattern of the hold display 212 changes is displayed by moving the newly stored special 1 hold (hereinafter, also referred to as the target hold) to the first hold display 212b to the third hold display 212d. It is roughly divided into the timing when the target is changed and the target change effect related to the target hold.

Next, the processing on the sub-control board 330 for executing the above-mentioned variation effect will be described. In the following, among the processes on the sub-control board 330, the processes that are not related to the fluctuation effect will not be described.

(Sub CPU initialization process of sub control board 330)
FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating a sub CPU initialization process (S1000) of the sub control board 330 according to the production reference example.

(Step S1000-1)
When the power is turned on, the sub CPU 330a reads the CPU initialization processing program from the sub ROM 330b, and also initializes and sets the flags stored in the sub RAM 330c.

(Step S1000-3)
Next, the sub CPU 330a performs a process of updating each effect random number, and thereafter repeats the process of step S1000-3 until the interrupt process is performed. It should be noted that a plurality of types of effect random numbers are provided, and here, each effect random number is updated asynchronously.

(Subtimer interrupt processing of subcontrol board 330)
FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating the sub-timer interrupt processing (S1100) of the sub-control board 330 according to the production reference example. The sub-control board 330 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) that generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (30 times per second). Then, due to the generation of the clock pulse by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, the sub CPU 330a reads the timer interrupt processing program and starts the sub timer interrupt processing.

(Step S1100-1)
The sub CPU 330a saves the register.

(Step S1100-3)
The sub CPU 330a performs a process for permitting an interrupt.

(Step S1100-5)
The sub CPU 330a updates various timer counters used in the sub control board 330. Here, the various timer counters are subtracted by 1 each time the sub-timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 330 is performed, and the subtraction is stopped when it reaches 0, unless otherwise specified.

(Step S1200)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 330c and performs various processes according to the received command. In the sub-control board 330, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 300, command reception interrupt processing is performed, and the command transmitted from the main control board 300 is stored in the reception buffer. Here, the command stored in the receive buffer is analyzed by the command reception interrupt process.

(Step S1100-7)
The sub CPU 330a refers to the time table and performs a time schedule management process for executing the process corresponding to the corresponding time stored in the time table. Here, based on the timer data set in the timetable, various flags are turned on and off, or commands are sent to each effect device to perform variable effects and major role effects. It will control the execution of the production.

(Step S1100-9)
The sub CPU 330a returns the register and ends the sub timer interrupt process.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating a look-ahead designation command reception process according to an effect reference example executed when a look-ahead designation command is received among the above command analysis processes. As described above, the look-ahead designation command (look-ahead designation variation pattern command) is set in the main control board 300 in the acquisition-time effect determination process (step S536-21, step S536-25, step S536-27 in FIG. 33). After that, it is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by the sub-command transmission process (step S100-65 in FIG. 23).

(Step S1210-1)
The sub CPU 330a first analyzes the received look-ahead designation command.

(Step S1210-3)
The sub CPU 330a stores the preliminary determination information based on the analysis result in step S1210-1. The sub RAM 330c of the sub control board 330 includes a first pre-determination information storage unit corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage area of the main control board 300 and a second pre-determination corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage area. An information storage unit is provided. The first predetermined information storage unit includes four storage units, a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit. The first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first pre-determination information storage unit correspond to the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure reservation storage area, respectively. Similarly, the second pre-determined information storage unit includes four storage units, a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit, and the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second pre-determination information storage unit include the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. The second special figure corresponds to the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the reserved storage area, respectively. Here, among the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure reserved storage area or the second special figure reserved storage area of the main control board 300, the storage unit corresponding to the storage unit in which the hold is newly stored. Pre-judgment information is stored in.

(Step S1210-5)
The sub CPU 330a performs a final hold display pattern determination process for determining the final display pattern of the hold display 212. Here, the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined and stored with reference to the final hold display pattern determination table (FIG. 68 (a)) based on the received look-ahead designation command.

(Step S1210-7)
The sub CPU 330a derives the number of times the display pattern of the hold display 212 is determined based on the storage unit in which the hold is stored, that is, the change timing of the hold display 212, and the number of times the hold display 212 is derived is the number of times the previous hold display pattern determination table is determined. (FIG. 68 (b)), the display pattern of the hold display 212 is determined. Then, the determined display pattern information of the hold display 212 is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the process is transferred to step S1210-9.

(Step S1210-9)
Based on the determinations in steps S1210-5 and S1210-7, the sub CPU 330a performs a hold display start process for starting the display of the hold display 212, and ends the look-ahead designation command reception process. As a result, when the hold is stored, the display of the corresponding hold display 212 is started.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart illustrating a variable command reception process executed when a variable command is received among the above command analysis processes according to the production reference example. As described above, the variation command is set in the special symbol variation number determination process (steps S612-13 and S612-17 in FIG. 39) on the main control board 300, and then the subcommand transmission process (step S100- in FIG. 23). It is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by 65).

(Step S1220-1)
Upon receiving the variation command, the sub CPU 330a first analyzes and stores the received variation pattern command.

(Step S1220-3)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random numbers (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3, and based on the acquired effect random numbers and the analysis result in step S1220-1, performs the execution pattern of the variation effect in the latter half. Decide and remember.

(Step S1220-5)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes and stores the received variable mode command.

(Step S1220-7)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random numbers (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3, and based on the acquired effect random numbers and the analysis result in step S1220-5, performs the execution pattern of the variation effect in the first half. Decide and remember.

(Step S1220-9)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random numbers (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3 for each advance notice effect, and is based on the acquired effect random numbers and the analysis results in steps S1220-1 and S1220-5. , Each notice effect determination table is referred to, and whether or not each advance notice effect is executed and the execution pattern are determined and stored.

(Step S1220-11)
The sub CPU 330a executes a shift process for shifting the pre-determination information stored in the pre-determination information storage unit. Here, when starting the variation effect based on the special 1 hold, the pre-determination information stored in the 4th storage unit to the 2nd storage unit of the 1st pre-determination information storage unit is stored in the 1st pre-determination information, respectively. When shifting to the third storage unit to the first storage unit of the storage unit and starting the variation effect based on the special 2 hold, the storage unit is stored in the fourth storage unit to the second storage unit of the second predetermination information storage unit. The pre-determined information is shifted to the third storage unit to the first storage unit of the second pre-determination information storage unit, respectively.

(Step S1220-13)
The sub CPU 330a performs a hold display shift process for moving and displaying the hold display 212. Further, here, when the display pattern of the hold display 212 changes, the execution data for changing the display pattern is set at a predetermined timing.

(Step S1220-15)
The sub CPU 330a sets the timer data of the timetable based on the determination of each of the above steps, and ends the variable command reception process. In addition, based on the timetable set here, in step S1100-7, the process of displaying the image for the variable effect on the main effect display unit 200a, the audio output process, the lighting control process of the effect lighting device 204, etc. The production execution control will be performed.

<Slot machine 400>
As shown in the external views of FIGS. 73 and 74, the slot machine 400 as a gaming machine has a housing 402 having an open front surface and a front surface rotatably arranged vertically on one end of the front surface of the housing 402. An upper door 404 and a front lower door 406 are provided. A colorless and transparent design display window 408 made of a glass plate, a transparent resin plate, or the like is provided in the lower center of the front upper door 404, and is located in the housing 402 at a position corresponding to the design display window 408. Three reels 410 (left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, right reel 410c) are provided independently and rotatably. As shown in the symbol arrangement of FIG. 75 (a), a plurality of types of symbols are arranged in each region equally divided into 20 on the outer peripheral surfaces of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c. Through the symbol display window 408, the player can visually recognize three consecutive symbols of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c, which are located in the upper, middle, and lower stages, for a total of nine symbols.

An operation unit installation table 412 is formed on the upper part of the front lower door 406, and the operation unit installation table 412 is provided with a medal insertion unit 414, a bet switch 416, a start switch 418, a stop switch 420, an effect switch 422, and the like. There is. The medal insertion unit 414 accepts the insertion of medals as a game value through the medal insertion slot 414a. The bet switch 416 inserts (bets) a specified number of medals required for one game among the medals electrically stored inside the slot machine 400 (hereinafter, simply referred to as credits).

The start switch 418 is composed of, for example, a lever capable of detecting a tilting operation, and detects a game start operation by a player. The stop switch 420 (stop switch 420a, stop switch 420b, stop switch 420c) is provided corresponding to each of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c, and detects the player's stop operation. The first stop operation of any of the stop switch 420a, the stop switch 420b, and the stop switch 420c by the player while the stop switch 420 can be stopped is called the first stop, and the first stop is performed. After that, the stop operation of any of the two stop switches 420 that have not been stopped is called the second stop, and the stop operation of the last remaining stop switch 420 after the second stop is called the third stop. .. The effect switch 422 is composed of, for example, a pressing switch and a jog dial switch rotatably arranged around the pressing switch, and detects a player's pressing operation or rotation operation.

A liquid crystal display unit 424 for displaying various images accompanying the effect is provided at substantially the center of the upper part of the front upper door 404. Further, on the upper portion and the left and right of the front upper door 404, for example, an effect lamp 426 composed of a high-intensity light emitting diode (LED) is provided. Further, at the left and right positions of the liquid crystal display unit 424 on the back surface of the front upper door 404 and at the left and right positions on the back surface of the front lower door 406, speakers 428 that produce an auditory effect by sound effects, musical sounds, or the like are provided.

The operation unit installation table 412 is provided with a main credit display unit 430 and a main payout display unit 432. Further, a sub-credit display unit 434 and a sub-payout display unit 436 are provided between the symbol display window 408 and the operation unit installation table 412. The number of medals credited (number of credits) is displayed on the main credit display unit 430 and the sub credit display unit 434, and the number of medals paid out is displayed on the main payout display unit 432 and the sub payout display unit 436. ..

Below the reel 410 in the housing 402, a medal payout device (medal hopper) 442 for paying out medals from the medal discharge port 440a is provided. Further, in the lower part of the front surface of the front lower door 406, a saucer portion 440 for storing medals paid out from the medal discharge port 440a is provided. Further, a power switch 444 is provided in the housing 402. The power switch 444 is operated by an administrator who manages the slot machine 400, and is used to switch between two states, a power off state and a power on state.

Further, in the housing 402, a setting key (not shown) and a setting change switch (collectively referred to as a setting value setting means) are provided on the main control board 500, which will be described later. In the slot machine 400, when a predetermined key (operation key) is inserted into the setting key and the power is turned on via the power switch 444 while being rotated from the OFF position to the ON position, the slot machine 400 shifts to the setting change mode. , The setting value can be changed (also simply called setting change). The set value indicates the degree of advantage of the player (machine discount) in stages. For example, the set value is expressed in 6 stages from 1 to 6, and in general, the larger the value of the set value, the higher the degree of advantage of the game as a whole. It is set to be high (the expected number of acquisitions is high). Then, each time the setting change switch is pressed in a state where the setting can be changed, the setting value is added by 1, for example, the setting value is changed to one of the 6-step setting values, and the start switch 418 is operated. Then, the set value is confirmed, and by returning the setting key to the original position (OFF position), the setting change mode ends and the game becomes possible. The setting can be changed only for a certain period after the power switch 444 is operated and the power is turned on.

In the slot machine 400, the game can be started, and when a specified number of medals are bet, the effective line A is activated and the operation on the start switch 418 is effective. Here, as for the bet, the case where the medal credited through the operation of the bet switch 416 is inserted, the case where the medal is inserted through the medal insertion unit 414, and the replay combination described in detail later are displayed on the effective line A. Including the case where medals are automatically inserted based on the above. Further, the effective line A is a line for determining the winning combination of the winning combination, and is one in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), the effective line A is the middle stage of the left reel 410a and the middle stage of the middle reel 410b among the nine symbols (3 reels x 3 stages of upper, middle and lower) facing the symbol display window 408. It is set to a line connecting the positions corresponding to the symbols that stop at the upper stage of the right reel 410c. The invalid line is used for the winning judgment of the winning combination, which displays another symbol combination that makes it easy to grasp the winning combination when it is difficult to grasp the winning combination only by the symbol combination displayed on the valid line A. It is a line other than the valid line A, and in this embodiment, five invalid lines B1, B2, B3, C1 and C2 shown in FIG. 75 (b) are assumed.

Then, when the start switch 418 is operated by the player, the game is started, the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c are rotated, and a winning type lottery or the like is executed. After that, the corresponding left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel 410c are stopped according to the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c, respectively. Then, depending on the combination of the lottery result of the winning type lottery and the symbol displayed on the valid line A, if the winning combination that can receive the medal payout wins, the medal payout is executed and the winning type that can receive the medal payout. If the player is unsuccessful, or if he / she wins but does not win, the game ends when the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c all stop.

In the present embodiment, in the above one game, a medal insertion through the medal insertion unit 414, a credited medal insertion through the operation of the bet switch 416, or a replay combination is displayed on the effective line A. After any of the automatic medals are inserted based on the above, the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c are rotationally controlled and the winning type lottery is executed according to the operation of the start switch 418 by the player. The left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel corresponding to the operated stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c according to the lottery result of the winning type lottery and the operation of the plurality of stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c by the player. When each of the 410c is stopped and controlled and the winning combination that can receive the medal payout wins, it means the game until the medal payout is executed. In addition, if the winning type that can receive the payout of medals is not won, or if the winning is not won, one game ends when the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c all stop. However, the start of one game may be read as the operation of the start switch 418 by the player instead of inserting the above medal or winning the replay combination. Further, the number of times such one game is repeated is defined as the number of games.

FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a schematic electrical configuration of the slot machine 400. As shown in FIG. 76, the slot machine 400 includes a main control board 500 (main control unit) that controls the progress of the game and a sub control board 502 (sub control unit) that controls the effect according to the progress of the game. A control board including the control board is provided. Further, the transmission of electrical signals between the main control board 500 and the sub control board 502 is limited to only one direction from the main control board 500 to the sub control board 502 from the viewpoint of fraud prevention and the like.

(Main control board 500)
The main control board 500 has a semiconductor integrated circuit including a main CPU 500a which is a central processing unit, a main ROM 500b in which programs and the like are stored, a main RAM 500c which functions as a work area, and the like, and controls the entire slot machine 400 in an integrated manner. .. Even when the power is turned off, the main RAM 500c is retained without being erased unless the settings are changed and the RAM is cleared.

Further, the main control board 500 functions by the main CPU 500a cooperating with the main RAM 500c based on the program stored in the main ROM 500b, the initialization means 600, the betting means 602, the winning type lottery means 604, and the reel control means. It has functional units such as 606, determination means 608, payout control means 610, game state control means 612, effect state control means 614, and command transmission means 616.

The main control board 500 receives various detection signals from the insertion medal detection unit 414b, the bet switch 416, the start switch 418, and the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c for detecting the insertion of medals into the medal insertion port 414a. The main CPU 500a executes various processes based on the received detection signal.

The initialization means 600 executes the initialization process on the main control board 500. The betting means 602 bets medals for use in the game. Based on the operation of the start switch 418, the winning type lottery means 604 performs a winning type lottery for determining the winning or not of the winning combination, and more specifically, the winning or not of the winning type including the winning combination, as will be described later.

The reel control means 606 controls the rotation of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c according to the operation of the start switch 418, and corresponds to the rotating left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel 410c, respectively. The corresponding left reel 410a, middle reel 410b, and right reel 410c are stopped and controlled according to the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c. Further, the reel control means 606 enables the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c in the previous game in response to the operation of the start switch 418, and then is used by the player to display the lottery result of the winning type lottery. The time until the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c is enabled (disabled by the completion of the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c in the previous game) is extended from the specified time, and the reel 410a is in the meantime. , 410b, 410c may be rotated in various modes to perform a reel effect (freeze effect). In the reel effect, an arbitrary switch that should be originally enabled is not enabled for a predetermined time, a process that should be originally executed is held for a predetermined time, or a signal of an arbitrary switch that should be originally transmitted / received is transmitted or received for a predetermined time. It can be realized by not having it.

Further, a reel drive control unit 450 is connected to the main control board 500. The reel drive control unit 450 drives the stepping motor 452 based on the rotation start signals of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c transmitted from the reel control means 606 in response to the operation signal of the start switch 418. do. Further, the reel drive control unit 450 detects the stop signals and the rotation position detection circuits 454 of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c, which are transmitted from the reel control means 606 in response to the operation signal of the stop switch 420. The drive of the stepping motor 452 is stopped based on the signal.

The determination means 608 determines whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the effective line A. Here, displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination on the valid line A may be simply referred to as winning. The payout control means 610 pays out medals by the number (value amount) corresponding to the winning combination based on the fact that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the valid line A (winning). Further, a medal payout device 442 is connected to the main control board 500, and the payout control means 610 discharges medals while counting the number of medals to be paid out.

The game state control means 612 refers to the result of the winning type lottery and the determination result of the determination means 608, and shifts the game state to any of a plurality of types of game states. Further, the effect state control means 614 refers to the result of the winning type lottery, the determination result of the determination means 608, and the transition information of the game state, and shifts the effect state to any of a plurality of types of effect states.

The command transmitting means 616 is a command related to the game associated with the operation of the betting means 602, the winning type lottery means 604, the reel control means 606, the determination means 608, the payout control means 610, the game state control means 612, the effect state control means 614, and the like. Are sequentially determined, and the determined commands are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control board 502.

Further, the main control board 500 is provided with a random number generator (random number generation means) 500d. The random number generator 500d sequentially increments the count value, loops it within a predetermined numerical range, and extracts the count value at a predetermined time point to obtain a random number. The random numbers generated by the random number generator 500d of the main control board 500 (hereinafter referred to as the winning type lottery random numbers) are used for the game profit given to the player, for example, the winning type lottery means 604 for determining the winning type. ..

(Sub-control board 502)
Further, the sub-control board 502 has various semiconductor integrated circuits including a sub CPU 502a which is a central processing device, a sub ROM 502b in which programs and the like are stored, a sub RAM 502c which functions as a work area, and the like, like the main control board 500. , In particular, the effect is controlled based on the command from the main control board 500. Further, like the main RAM 500c, a backup power supply (not shown) is connected to the sub RAM 502c, and even when the power supply is turned off, the data is retained without being erased. Similar to the main control board 500, the sub control board 502 is also provided with a random number generator (random number generation means) 502d, and the random numbers generated by the random number generator 502d (hereinafter referred to as effect lottery random numbers) are mainly used. It is used to determine the mode of production.

Further, in the sub control board 502, the sub CPU 502a functions by cooperating with the sub RAM 502c based on the program stored in the sub ROM 502b, such as the initialization determination means 630, the command receiving means 632, and the effect control means 634. It has a functional part.

The initialization determining means 630 executes the initialization process on the sub-control board 502. The command receiving means 632 receives a command from another control board such as the main control board 500, and processes the command. The effect control means 634 receives the detection signal from the effect switch 422, and determines the effect of the game performed by each device of the liquid crystal display unit 424, the speaker 428, and the effect lamp 426 based on the received command. Specifically, the effect control means 634 is used to display image data on the liquid crystal display unit 424 and to produce an electric effect through an illumination device such as an effect lamp 426, a sub credit display unit 434, and a sub payout display unit 436. In addition to determining the decoration data, the audio data constituting the audio to be output from the speaker 428 is determined. Then, the effect control means 634 executes the effect of the determined game. The production also includes an auxiliary production. The auxiliary effect is the correct answer of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c, which is the winning condition for the correct answer when the correct answer (specific role) and the incorrect answer are duplicated in the winning type lottery. It is an effect of notifying the operation mode. With such an auxiliary effect, the player can easily display the symbol combination corresponding to the correct answer combination on the effective line A. The effect state in which such an auxiliary effect is executed is called an AT (assist time) effect state. In addition, a so-called ART game state in which the AT effect state and the RT (replay time) game state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is high is advanced in parallel may be used.

In the following, the notification managed by a board other than the main control board 500 including the sub control board 502 such as the liquid crystal display unit 424, the effect lamp 426, the speaker 428, the sub credit display unit 434, and the sub payout display unit 436. The means may be referred to as another notification means. On the other hand, the notification means managed by the main control board 500, such as the main credit display unit 430 and the main payout display unit 432, may be referred to as a main notification means (instruction monitor). In addition, the main notification means and other notification means capable of executing the auxiliary effect may be collectively referred to as the auxiliary effect execution means. The effect state control means 614 causes the auxiliary effect execution means to execute the auxiliary effect in the AT effect state.

(Table used in the main control board 500)
77 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning combination, and FIGS. 78 and 79 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the winning type lottery table.

The slot machine 400 is provided with a plurality of types of gaming states and effect states, as will be described in detail later, and the gaming states and effect states are shifted according to the progress of the game. Then, in the main control board 500, a plurality of winning type lottery tables and the like corresponding to the game states managed and controlled by the game state control means 612 are stored in the main ROM 500b. The winning type lottery means 604 sets the corresponding winning type lottery table in the main ROM 500b according to the current set value (indicating the easiness of obtaining the game profit stepwise) stored in the main RAM 500c and the current game state. Based on the winning type lottery table extracted from, it is determined which winning type in the winning type lottery table the winning type lottery random number acquired in response to the operation signal of the start switch 418 corresponds to.

Here, the winning combination that constitutes the winning type extracted in the winning type lottery table includes a replay combination, a small combination, and a bonus combination. The replay combination is a combination in which, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed on the effective line A, the game can be executed again without making a new bet of the medal by the player. The small winning combination is a combination in which a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the symbol combination by displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination on the effective line A. Further, as for the bonus combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the effective line A, so that the gaming state managed by the gaming state control means 612 is changed to the bonus gaming state (the gaming state during RBB operation, which will be described later). It is a role that can be transferred to.

As shown in FIG. 77, the winning combinations in the present embodiment are provided with winning combinations "Replay 1" to "Replay 7" as replay combinations. In addition, as small wins, winning wins "small win 1" to "small win 39" are provided. In addition, a winning combination "RBB" is provided as a bonus combination. In FIG. 77, one or a plurality of symbols constituting each winning combination are associated with each of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the stop switch 420 is operated by the player, if the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination that can be won are on the effective line A, the reel control means. By 606, stop control is performed so that the symbol stops on the effective line A. Further, when the stop switch 420 is operated, there are no symbols on the effective line A that constitute a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination that can be won, but four symbols in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the reel 410. When it exists within the range corresponding to the minute (pull-in range), the number of distant symbols becomes the number of sliding frames by the reel control means 606, and the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination are effective. The stop control is performed so as to stop after maintaining the rotation for the number of sliding frames so as to be pulled onto the line A. In addition, if there are a plurality of symbols in the reel 410 corresponding to the winning combination that can be won, and all of them are within the pull-in range of the reel 410, any of the symbols is valid line A according to a predetermined priority. It is determined whether to pull it upward, and stop control is performed so that the priority symbol is pulled onto the effective line A and the rotation is maintained for the number of sliding frames and then stopped. When the stop switch 420 is pressed, if there is a symbol on the effective line A that constitutes a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination other than the winning combination, the symbol is controlled by the reel control means 606. The so-called kicking process, which prevents the reel from stopping on the effective line A, is also executed in parallel. Further, as will be described later, when an operation mode (operation order or operation timing) is set as a winning condition for the winning combination included in the winning type, the reel control means 606 will perform the winning combination according to the operation mode of the player. The symbol combination corresponding to is stopped and controlled so that it can be displayed on the effective line A.

Then, for example, the symbols constituting the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations "Replay 1" to "Replay 4", the winning combinations "Small role 1" to "Small role 6", and "Small role 35" to "Small role 39". Are arranged in each reel 410 so that they can always be displayed on the effective line A by the above-mentioned stop control. Such a winning combination may be expressed as PB = 1. On the other hand, for example, the symbols constituting the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations "Replay 5" to "Replay 7", the winning combinations "small combination 7" to "small combination 34", and the winning combination "RBB" are in each reel 410. Because the stop control is not necessarily arranged so that it can be displayed on the effective line A, so-called omission may occur. Such a winning combination may be expressed as PB ≠ 1.

As shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the winning type lottery table, a plurality of winning areas are divided, and the winning type to be the target of the lottery differs depending on each game state, and the presence or absence of unwinning (loss) differs. Or something. In FIGS. 78 and 79, the winning area assigned to each gaming state (non-internal gaming state (non-internal), RBB internal medium gaming state (RBB internal), RBB operating gaming state (RBB operating)). The winning type) is represented by "◎" or "○", but in reality, the winning type lottery table corresponding to each of the plurality of gaming states is stored in the main ROM 500b. In addition, "◎" indicates that the lottery for the advantageous section can be performed, and "○" indicates that the lottery for the advantageous section cannot be performed. It indicates that it is a winning type.

In the winning type lottery table, each of the compartmentalized winning areas is associated with a predetermined number (winning range value), which is a numerical value indicating the winning range, and the winning type, and all assigned to each gaming state. The total number of winning areas is the total number of winning type lottery random numbers (65536). Therefore, the probability that each winning type is determined is a value obtained by dividing the number of places associated with the winning area by the total number of winning type lottery random numbers. Based on the game state at that time, the winning type lottery means 604 sequentially acquires the number of the winning areas from the plurality of winning areas in the winning type lottery table, and determines the number of the winning number by the winning type lottery random number. When the value after subtraction becomes less than 0 by subtracting from, the winning type associated with the winning area at that time is used as the lottery result of the winning type lottery. In addition, if the number of winning areas in the winning area 1 or higher is subtracted from the winning type lottery random numbers and the value after subtraction is 0 or more, the winning type "loss" in the winning area 0 is the winning type lottery. Will be the result of the lottery.

Here, the winning combination "RBB" constituting the winning type "RBB" will be supplemented. The predetermined first-class special accessory RB is an accessory that increases the number of combinations of symbols related to winning for each specified number, or increases the probability that the condition device for winning for each specified number operates, and is predetermined. It operates when it is played, and can continue to operate until the result of the game is obtained no more than 12 times. Here, the condition device is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for displaying a winning combination, a replay, a combination of symbols related to the operation of the accessory or the accessory continuous operation device, and is a winning type lottery (winning type lottery). It means the one that operates when the lottery by the computer performed in the game machine) is won, that is, the winning flag. The accessory continuous operation device (winning combination "RBB") related to the first-class special accessory that constitutes the winning type "RBB" is a device that can continuously operate the first-class special accessory RB. Yes, it operates when a specific combination of symbols is displayed, and ends the operation when a predetermined combination is displayed.

According to the winning type lottery table of FIG. 78, for example, the winning type "loss" is associated with the winning area 0, and when the winning type is won, the symbol corresponding to any of the winning combinations shown in FIG. 77 is obtained. The combination is not displayed on the valid line A, and the medal is not paid out. However, as will be described later, when the RBB internal winning flag is carried over to the next game, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" may be displayed on the effective line A by winning the winning type "Loss". It will be possible.

Further, the winning area 1 is associated with the winning type "small combination ALL" in which the winning combinations "small combination 1" to "small combination 39" are duplicated, and the winning combination "small combination ALL" is associated with the winning area 2. The winning type "1 piece ALLA" in which "small winning combination 11" to "small winning combination 39" are duplicated is associated, and the winning combination "small winning combination 12" to "small winning combination 27" is associated with the winning area 3. The winning type "1 sheet ALLB" that is included in duplicate is associated. Further, the winning area 4 is associated with the winning type "choice 1 sheet 1" in which the winning combination "small combination 12" and the "small combination 20" are duplicated, and the winning combination "small" is associated with the winning area 5. The winning type "choice 1 sheet 2" in which the winning combination "13" and "small winning combination 21" are duplicated is associated, and the winning winning combination "small winning combination 14" and "small winning combination 22" are duplicated in the winning area 6. The winning type "choice 1 piece 3" is associated with the winning type "choice 1 piece 3", and the winning type "choice 1 piece 4" in which the winning combination "small winning combination 15" and "small winning combination 23" are duplicated is included in the winning area 7. It is associated. Further, the winning area 8 is associated with the winning type "weak cherry" in which the winning combination "small combination 35" and the "small combination 36" are duplicated, and the winning area 9 is associated with the winning combination "small combination 37". The winning type "strong cherry" in which "small winning combination 39" is duplicated is associated, and the winning winning combination "small winning combination 7", "small winning combination 8", and "small winning combination 11" are associated with each other. The winning type "watermelon A" that is duplicated is associated, and the winning area 11 is associated with the winning type "watermelon B" that includes the winning combinations "small winning combination 7" to "small winning combination 10". The winning area 12 is associated with a winning type "strong bell" in which the winning combination "small combination 1", "small combination 3", and "small combination 5" are duplicated. Further, the winning area 13 is associated with the winning type "common bell A" in which the winning combinations "small combination 1" to "small combination 6" are duplicated, and the winning combination "small combination" is associated with the winning area 14. The winning type "common bell B" in which "1" to "small winning combination 6" and "small winning combination 11" are duplicated is associated.

In the winning areas 15 to 26, there are 11 correct batting orders (winning batting orders "small winning combination 1" to "small winning combination 6") and incorrect batting orders with one payout number (winning winning combination "small winning combination"). The selected winning types (winning types "batting order bell 1A" to "batting order bell 6A", "batting order bell 1B" to "batting order bell 6B") in which the winning combination 12 "to" small winning combination 34 ") are duplicated are associated with each other. Has been done.

Further, according to the winning type lottery table of FIG. 79, the winning types "symbol replay A1" to "symbol replay A7" in which the winning combinations "replay 1" to "replay 7" are duplicated are included in the winning areas 27 to 39. , "Symbol Replay B1" to "Symbol Replay B6" are associated with each other. Further, the winning area 40 is associated with a winning type "normal replay" in which the winning combinations "replay 1" and "replay 2" are duplicated.

Further, the winning areas 41 to 46 are associated with winning types "RBB1" to "RBB6" in which the winning combination "RBB" is included alone or in combination with other small combinations.

Then, when a winning combination including a plurality of winning combinations is won in duplicate, a winning condition regarding which of the winning combinations the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is preferentially displayed on the effective line A, for example, a stop The order in which the switches 420a, 420b, and 420c are operated is set.

In the following description, the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c for stopping the reels in the order of the left reel 410a, the middle reel 410b, and the right reel 410c is defined as "stroke order 1", and the left reel 410a, the right reel 410c, and the middle reel 410b The operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c that stop the reels in order is set to "striking order 2", and the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c that stop the reels in the order of the middle reel 410b, the left reel 410a, and the right reel 410c is "striking order". 3 ”, the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c that stop the reels in the order of the middle reel 410b, the right reel 410c, and the left reel 410a is set to“ striking order 4 ”, and the right reel 410c, the left reel 410a, and the middle reel 410b are in that order. The operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c for stopping the reels is set to "striking order 5", and the operation of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c for stopping the reels in the order of the right reel 410c, the middle reel 410b, and the left reel 410a is "striking order 6". ".

For example, in the non-internal gaming state, when the winning type "batting order bell 1A" in the winning area 15 is won and the operation is performed according to the correct answer operation mode (batting order 1), the winning combination with 11 payouts is the correct answering combination. Stop control is performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small winning combination 1" is preferentially displayed on the effective line A. In addition, when the operation is performed in batting order 2, the stop control is performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "small combination 28", which is an incorrect answer of one payout number, is preferentially displayed on the effective line A. When the operation is performed in the batting order 3 or 4, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "small combination 12", which is an incorrect answer of one payout number, is preferentially 1/4 on the effective line A. When stop control is performed so that it is displayed with a probability and operations are performed in batting orders 5 and 6, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "small combination 16", which is an incorrect answer of one payout number, is effective line A. Stop control is performed so that it is preferentially displayed on the top with a probability of 1/4.

The winning probabilities (numbers) of each winning type in the winning areas 15 to 26 are set to be equal. Since the player cannot usually know which winning type is won, it is difficult to win the correct answer by providing the winning areas 15 to 26 as described above. Further, as described above, even if the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c are operated in the batting order in which the incorrect answer is preferentially displayed, the symbol combination corresponding to the incorrect answer is not necessarily displayed on the effective line A. Therefore, depending on the operation mode, omission may occur (PB ≠ 1).

When any of the above-mentioned winning types is won, the internal winning flag corresponding to each winning type is established (ON), and the stop control of each reel 410 is performed according to the establishment status of the internal winning flag. The Rukoto. At this time, if the winning type including the small winning combination is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to these winning combination cannot be displayed on the valid line A in the game, after the game is completed. The internal winning flag is turned off. That is, the right to win a small winning combination is limited to the game in which the small winning combination is included in the winning type, and the right cannot be carried over to the next game. On the other hand, when the winning type including the winning combination "RBB" is won, the RBB internal winning flag is established (ON), and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" is on the valid line A. The RBB internal winning flag is carried over across the game until it is displayed. If the internal winning flag corresponding to the winning type including the replay combination is established, the symbol combination corresponding to any of the replay combinations included in the winning type is always on the valid line A. It is displayed, and after the processing necessary for performing the next game without requiring a medal is performed, the internal winning flag is turned off.

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 80. Here, a plurality of gaming states such as a non-internal gaming state, an RBB internal medium gaming state, and an RBB operating gaming state are prepared. As will be described later, each game state is changed according to the winning of the bonus combination, the winning (operation), and the end.

The non-internal gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the initial state in a plurality of gaming states. In such a non-internal gaming state, the winning probability of the replay combination is set to about 1 / 7.3. Further, in the non-internal gaming state, the winning combination "RBB" is determined with a predetermined probability (for example, about 1/30).

The game state control means 612 shifts the game state according to the winning of the winning combination “RBB”. For example, in the game in which the winning combination "RBB" is won, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" is displayed on the effective line A, the game state control means 612 changes the game state to the game state during RBB operation. Make the transition (1).

In the gaming state during RBB operation, the winning probability of the replay combination is set to 0. In the gaming state during the RBB operation, the winning type "small role ALL" is in the winning area 1, and the winning types "1 piece ALLA" and "1 piece ALLB" are in the winning areas 2 and 3. It is set. If you win the winning type "Small role ALL", the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combination "Small role 1" to "Small role 39" is displayed on the valid line A, and you win the winning type "1 piece ALL". Then, the stop control is performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations "small combination 11" to "small combination 39" is displayed on the effective line A. Here, the expected number of cards to be acquired per unit game in the game state during RBB operation is lowered due to the configuration of such a small winning combination.

When the end condition of the gaming state during RBB operation is satisfied, that is, when the acquired number reaches a predetermined number, the gaming state control means 612 shifts the gaming state to the non-internal gaming state (2).

On the other hand, in the game in which the winning combination "RBB" is won, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" cannot be displayed on the effective line A, the game state control means 612 displays the game state inside the RBB. Shift to the medium gaming state (special gaming state) (3).

In the RBB internal medium game state, the winning probability of the replay combination is set to about 1 / 5.9. In addition, in the game state inside the RBB, the winning type "Loss" will not be won. In other words, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" cannot be displayed on the valid line A in the winning game of the winning combination "RBB", then a smaller combination than the winning combination "RBB" Since the replay combination is preferentially stopped and controlled on the effective line A, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "RBB" cannot be displayed on the effective line A. Therefore, once the gaming state shifts to the RBB internal medium gaming state, the RBB internal medium gaming state is maintained without the subsequent transition of the gaming state. Here, while maintaining the RBB internal medium gaming state, the AT effect state is realized in the RBB internal medium gaming state.

Here, in the RBB internal medium game state, since a plurality of types of correct answer combinations are won without overlapping each other, it is possible to increase the chances that the correct answer combination can be won, and as a result, for example, the RBB internal medium game. AT effect in the state By performing the auxiliary effect in the state, it is possible to easily obtain a medal. On the other hand, in the game state during RBB operation, since multiple types of correct answer combinations are won in duplicate, there are few chances that the correct answer combination can be won, so the correct answer combination is won more than the AT production state in other game states. The chances of being able to do it are reduced, making it difficult for players to increase the number of medals they own. Therefore, while having the function of the RBB operating game state in which the winning probability of the winning combination is higher than the RBB internal medium game state, the RBB internal game state is changed to the RBB internal medium game state in terms of medal acquisition performance. It is possible to realize a specification that is inferior (accelerator RBB).

(Transition of production state)
FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of the effect state. Hereinafter, the effect state (non-AT effect state, AT effect state) transitioned by the effect state control means 614 on the main control board 500 will be described in detail. In the following, a case where the gaming state is the RBB internal middle gaming state will be described.

Here, in order to comprehensively and uniformly determine whether or not the game state in which the medal acquisition performance is high is biased, a game section having performance related to the instruction function, that is, an auxiliary effect (instruction function) is executed. A game section that is advantageous to the player, including a game section, is defined as an advantageous section (specific section). In the advantageous section, for example, when the auxiliary effect is activated as a result of drawing a lottery related to the operation of the auxiliary effect on the main control board 500, the main control board 500 can identify the content of the instruction. It is a game section in which instruction information may be transmitted to a peripheral board such as a sub-control board 502 only when it is displayed on the means. In addition, a game section different from the advantageous section is defined as a non-advantageous section. Therefore, the plurality of effect states (non-AT effect state, AT effect state) belong to either the advantageous section or the non-advantageous section which is the game section. In the present embodiment, almost all the effect states belong to the advantageous section, and the non-advantageous section is realized in a part of the non-AT effect state (here, the non-advantageous effect state).

In addition, in the winning mode in which the correct answer role is missed if there is no auxiliary effect in the advantageous section, the assistance to assist the winning of the correct answer role in the selected winning type in which the payout of the correct answer role is the maximum (here, 11 cards). When performing an effect (an auxiliary effect that can obtain the maximum number of payouts), for example, the section indicator 460 must be turned on to notify the effect.

Further, in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to make the winning probability of the winning type different for each set value, but the probability of determining the transition to the effect state (AT effect state) accompanied by the auxiliary effect in the same winning type. Must not be different for each set value. On the other hand, in the advantageous section, if both the winning probability of the winning type and the probability of determining the transition (or addition) to the effect state (AT effect state) accompanied by the auxiliary effect in the same winning type are different for each set value. It is possible to make it.

Therefore, the effect state control means 614 manages the transition between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section in addition to the management of the transition of the effect state. In addition, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by satisfying the following termination conditions regardless of such management. For example, based on the fact that the value counted in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value (for example, the number of staying games (number of game executions) reaches 1500 games, or the number of acquired games (net increase number) exceeds 2400). And forcibly terminate. In any case, the effect state control means 614 resets all the information updated in the advantageous section (all variables affecting the performance related to the instruction function) by shifting from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section. ..

(Non-AT production state, AT production state)
In the non-AT effect state, the execution frequency of the auxiliary effect is extremely low and the auxiliary effect is hardly performed as compared with the AT effect state, so that the number of medals that can be obtained is limited. Here, as the non-AT effect state, six effect states such as a normal effect state, a non-advantageous effect state, a preparatory effect state, a first interval effect state, a continuous lottery effect state, and a second interval effect state are provided.

In the AT effect state, by having the auxiliary effect executing means execute the auxiliary effect at the time of winning all the selected winning types, it is possible to acquire many medals while suppressing the consumption of medals. Therefore, the player can advance the game advantageously by shifting to the AT effect state as compared with the non-AT effect state. Here, a pseudo bonus effect state is provided as the AT effect state. Hereinafter, each effect state (normal effect state, pseudo bonus effect state, non-advantageous effect state, preparatory effect state, first interval effect state, continuous lottery effect state, second interval effect state) will be described individually.

(Each production state)
The normal effect state is an effect state corresponding to the initial state among the plurality of effect states. The effect state control means 614 performs an AT lottery in a normal effect state. The AT lottery is a lottery that determines the transition to the AT effect state, and the effect state control means 614 performs the AT lottery with a different probability for each winning type determined by the winning type lottery. Then, when the AT lottery is won, the effect state control means 614 shifts the effect state to the pseudo bonus effect state, which is the AT effect state, after the predetermined number of precursor games has elapsed (1). Further, when a predetermined ceiling condition (for example, the normal effect state is continuously consumed by a predetermined number of games) is satisfied in the normal effect state without shifting to the pseudo bonus effect state (so-called ceiling arrival), the effect state control means 614 Shifts the production state to the pseudo-bonus production state (1).

In the pseudo-bonus effect state, the auxiliary effect is executed until a predetermined end condition (for example, the number of digested games reaches the predetermined number of games) is satisfied, and the player obtains, for example, expectation in the pseudo-bonus effect state. The number of sheets can be 3.5. In the pseudo-bonus effect state, mainly two end conditions are prepared. For example, when the end condition is that the number of digested games reaches a predetermined number of games, the predetermined number of games is provided in two stages of 30 and 80, and one of them is determined by lottery. In the pseudo-bonus effect state, of course, the larger the number of games digested, the more game profits the player will get. Therefore, the player wants the predetermined number of games to be 80 instead of 30. However, even if 30 is determined as the predetermined number of games, a promotion lottery for increasing the predetermined number of auxiliary effects from 30 to 80 is also performed during the digestion. Here, as an end condition of the pseudo-bonus effect state, it is illustrated that the number of digested games has reached the predetermined number of games, but instead, the number of auxiliary effects that can obtain the maximum number of payouts is predetermined. It may be adopted that the number is reached or the number of acquired sheets (net increase number) reaches a predetermined number.

Then, when a predetermined end condition is satisfied in the pseudo bonus effect state, the effect state control means 614 may shift the effect state to the non-advantageous effect state (2). At this time, the effect state control means 614 temporarily shifts the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section, and resets all the information updated in the advantageous section. For example, if the pseudo-bonus effect state in the previous stage is the first pseudo-bonus effect state, that is, if the pseudo-bonus effect state immediately after the transition from the normal effect state, the effect state control means 614 has a disadvantageous effect on the effect state. At the same time as shifting to the production state, the advantageous section is temporarily shifted to the non-advantageous section. Further, even when the pseudo bonus effect state in the previous stage is a pseudo bonus effect state that is a multiple of 3 (3, 6, ...) That does not go through the normal effect state, the effect state control means 614 temporarily sets the advantageous section. , The advantageous section is temporarily shifted to the non-advantageous section while shifting to the non-advantageous section.

Then, the effect state control means 614 draws a lottery for the transition to the advantageous section with a high probability (for example, 1/2), and after digesting several games, returns to the advantageous section and shifts the effect state to the preparatory effect state (for example). 3). This is to prevent the pseudo-bonus effect state from being forcibly terminated when the value counted in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value.

On the other hand, if the pseudo-bonus effect state in the previous stage is not the first time, or is not the pseudo-bonus effect state that is a multiple of 3 that does not go through the normal effect state, the effect state control means 614 shifts the effect state to the non-advantageous effect state. Without doing so, it directly shifts to the preparatory production state (4). This is because the pseudo-bonus effect state is not forcibly terminated when the value counted in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined value, and the advantageous section is not terminated unnecessarily.

In the preparatory effect state, the effect state control means 614 draws a lottery for the transition to the first interval effect state with a high probability (for example, 1/2), and based on the determination of the transition to the first interval effect state, the effect state. Shifts to the first interval production state (5).

The first interval effect state continues until a predetermined end condition (for example, digestion of 40 games) is satisfied, during which the continuous lottery of the pseudo bonus effect state is executed. Unlike the pseudo-bonus effect state, the first interval effect state has a small expected number of acquisitions per unit game and may have a negative value. In the present embodiment, when the advantageous section is won in the non-advantageous section, the effect state is set to be the first interval effect state without fail. Therefore, after the end of the pseudo-bonus effect state, even if the advantageous section continues or, as described above, even if the section once shifts to the non-advantageous section, the state shifts to the first interval effect state. It becomes. Then, when the predetermined end condition in the first interval effect state is satisfied, the effect state control means 614 shifts the effect state to the continuous lottery effect state (6).

The continuous lottery effect state continues until a predetermined end condition (for example, digestion of 5 games) is satisfied, and finally, the result of the continuous lottery in the pseudo bonus effect state in the first interval effect state is notified. Unlike the pseudo-bonus effect state, the continuous lottery effect state also has a small expected number of acquisitions per unit game, and may have a negative value. If the transition (continuation) to the pseudo-bonus effect state is determined in the first interval effect state, the effect state control means 614 shifts the effect state to the pseudo-bonus effect state (7), and the pseudo-bonus effect state. If the transition to the effect state is not determined, the effect state control means 614 returns the effect state to the normal effect state (8).

As described above, in the present embodiment, once the pseudo-bonus effect state is entered, the pseudo-bonus effect state → the preparation effect state → the first interval effect state → the continuous lottery effect state unless the continuous lottery in the continuous lottery effect state is omitted. By repeating the transition of, the player can accumulate medals.

In the preparatory effect state, the effect state control means 614 also performs a transition lottery to the second interval effect state in addition to the transition lottery to the first interval effect state. However, the transition probability to the second interval effect state (for example, 1/20) is set smaller than the transition probability to the first interval effect state (for example, 1/2). If the transition to the second interval effect state is determined before the transition to the first interval effect state is determined in the preparatory effect state, the effect state control means 614 determines the transition to the second interval effect state. Based on the above, the effect state is shifted to the second interval effect state (9). In addition, although the example of performing the transition lottery to the second interval effect state in the preparatory effect state is given here, similarly, the transition lottery to the second interval effect state may be performed in the non-advantageous effect state.

Like the first interval effect state, the second interval effect state continues until a predetermined end condition (for example, digestion of 40 games) is satisfied, and during that time, a continuous lottery of the pseudo bonus effect state is executed. Similar to the first interval effect state, the second interval effect state is different from the pseudo bonus effect state, and the expected number of acquired cards per unit game is small and may be a negative value.

However, in the second interval effect state, the pseudo bonus effect state is determined with a higher probability than in the first interval effect state. For example, in the first interval effect state, the pseudo bonus effect state is determined at 1/58 of each game for 40 games (winning probability 50%), and in the second interval effect state, the pseudo bonus effect state is determined for 40 games. Is determined by every game 1/25 (winning probability 80%). Then, when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the effect state control means 614 shifts the effect state to the continuous lottery effect state (10). Once the transition to the second interval effect state is determined, the process does not shift to the non-advantageous effect state, the preparatory effect state, or the first interval effect state until the continuous lottery effect state is leaked. The pseudo-bonus effect state only shifts to the second interval effect state (11). Therefore, the player can always receive a continuous lottery with a high probability. Further, once the transition to the second interval effect state is determined, the effect state control means 614 immediately changes the effect state even if the transition to the pseudo bonus effect state is not determined in the continuous lottery effect state. It shifts to the non-advantageous production state without returning to the normal production state (12). Therefore, if the transition to the pseudo bonus effect state is not determined in the continuous lottery effect state, the pseudo bonus effect state → the preparation effect state → the first interval effect state → continue until the continuous lottery in the continuous lottery effect state is leaked again. The transition of the lottery effect state can be repeated. In this way, once the transition to the second interval effect state is made, the transition of the pseudo bonus effect state → the second interval effect state → the continuous lottery effect state can be repeated with high probability, and further, the pseudo in the continuous lottery effect state. Even if the transition to the bonus effect state is not decided, at least the transition of the pseudo bonus effect state → the preparation effect state → the first interval effect state → the continuous lottery effect state can be repeated, so that the number of players is larger. It is possible to accumulate medals. That is, it can be said that the second interval effect state is more advantageous than the first interval effect state.

Further, as described above, when the effect state control means 614 shifts from the pseudo bonus effect state to the second interval effect state, it may shift to a non-advantageous section unlike the transition to the first interval effect state. No. In the present embodiment, when the pseudo-bonus effect state is the first pseudo-bonus effect state, the effect state control means 614 does not shift to the second interval effect state, and temporarily shifts the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section. To shift to, be sure to shift to the first interval production state. Then, the advantageous section is once reset. Therefore, even if the advantageous section is not reset when shifting to the second interval effect state, the pseudo-bonus effect state via the second interval effect state does not end in a short period due to the limitation of the advantageous section, and the player , Pseudo-bonus effect state → 2nd interval effect state → Continuous lottery effect state loop, many medals can be obtained.

Hereinafter, specific processing in the main control board 500 and the sub control board 502 will be described with reference to the flowchart.

(CPU initialization process of main control board 500)
FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating the CPU initialization process in the main control board 500. When power is supplied from the power supply board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 500a, and the main CPU 500a performs the following CPU initialization process (S2000).

(Step S2000-1)
The main CPU 500a reads the boot program from the main ROM 500b as the initial setting process in response to the power-on, and also performs the setting process necessary for executing various processes.

(Step S2000-3)
The main CPU 500a sets the wait processing time in the timer counter.

(Step S2000-5)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the power supply cutoff warning signal is detected. The main control board 500 is provided with a power supply cutoff detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value, a power supply cutoff warning signal is output from the power supply cutoff detection circuit. If the power off warning signal is detected, the process is transferred to step S2000-3, and if the power off warning signal is not detected, the process is transferred to step S2000-7.

(Step S2000-7)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the wait processing time set in step S2000-3 has elapsed. As a result, if it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S2000-9, and if it is determined that the wait time has not elapsed, the process is transferred to step S2000-5.

(Step S2000-9)
The main CPU 500a executes a process necessary for permitting access to the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2000-11)
The main CPU 500a executes the checksum confirmation process. Here, the main CPU 500a calculates a checksum, and determines whether the calculated checksum does not match the checksum saved when the power is turned off (abnormal), and whether the backup is abnormal. Then, when the main CPU 500a determines that either one or both of the backup and the checksum are abnormal, the backup error flag is turned on, and when it is determined that both the backup and the checksum are not abnormal, the backup error flag is set. Turn off.

(Step S2000-13)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the backup error flag is on. As a result, if it is determined that the backup error flag is on, the process is transferred to step S2010, and if it is determined that the backup error flag is not on, the process is transferred to step S2020.

(Step S2010)
The main CPU 500a executes a cold start process. The cold start process will be described later.

(Step S2020)
The main CPU 500a executes a set value switching process for switching the set value. The setting value switching process will be described later.

(Step S2030)
The main CPU 500a executes a state return process for returning to the state immediately before the power is turned off. The state return processing will be described later.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart illustrating a cold start process (S2010) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2010-1)
The main CPU 500a clears the used area in the main RAM 500c and executes a used area RAM check process for detecting an abnormality in the used area.

(Step S2010-3)
The main CPU 500a clears another area (unused area) in the main RAM 500c, and executes another area RAM check process for detecting an abnormality in the other area. When an abnormality is detected in another area in the other area RAM check process, the main CPU 500a turns on the RAM read / write error flag.

(Step S2010-5)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "EA" indicating an abnormality in the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2010-7)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not an abnormality has been detected in step S2010-1. As a result, if it is determined that an abnormality has been detected in step S2010-1, the process is shifted to step S2011, and if it is determined that no abnormality has been detected in step S2010-1, the process proceeds to step S2010-9. Move the process.

(Step S2010-9)
The main CPU 500a acquires a RAM read / write error flag that is turned on when an abnormality is detected in step S2010-3.

(Step S2010-11)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the RAM read / write error flag is on. As a result, if it is determined that the RAM read / write error flag is on, the process is transferred to step S2011, and if it is determined that the RAM read / write error flag is not on, the process is transferred to step S2020.

(Step S2020)
The main CPU 500a executes a set value switching process for switching the set value. The setting value switching process will be described later.

(Step S2010-13)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "E7" indicating that it is a backup error.

(Step S2011)
The main CPU 500a executes an error stop process for stopping the progress of the game due to an error. The error stop processing will be described later.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating an error stop process (S2011) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2011-1)
The main CPU 500a sets the initial stack pointer value as the address of the stack pointer.

(Step S2011-3)
The main CPU 500a executes an error setting process for displaying an error and setting a warning sound.

(Step S2011-5)
The main CPU 500a sets the external signals 1 to 3 output bit off, which turns off the output image of the bits corresponding to the external signals 1 to 3.

(Step S2011-7)
The main CPU 500a executes an output port image set process for updating the output image for the bits set in step S2011-5.

(Step S2011-9)
The main CPU 500a shifts to an endless loop. As a result, the progress of the game is stopped.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating a set value switching process (S2020) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2020-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires the signal of the input port 1 and determines whether or not the set value switching condition is satisfied based on the acquired signal of the input port 1. As a result, if it is determined that the set value switching condition is not satisfied, the set value switching process is terminated, and if it is determined that the set value switching condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step S2020-3. .. Here, the signal of the input port 1 includes a signal indicating whether or not the front upper door 404 and the front lower door 406 are open, and a signal indicating whether or not the setting key is turned on. Then, here, when the signal indicating that the front upper door 404 and the front lower door 406 are open and the signal indicating that the setting key is turned on are acquired, the setting value switching condition is set. It is judged that it is established.

(Step S2020-3)
The main CPU 500a executes a RAM clearing process for clearing the used area to be cleared when the setting is changed in the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2020-5)
The main CPU 500a executes a table content setting process for transferring the table data of the data table at the time of switching the set value to the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2020-7)
The main CPU 500a sets a setting change start command indicating that the setting value change is started in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2020-9)
The main CPU 500a executes an edge check process for detecting the falling edge (on-edge) of the signal of the input port.

(Step S2020-11)
The main CPU 500a acquires the set value data indicating the current set value.

(Step S2020-13)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the on-edge of the setting change switch is detected in step S2020-9. As a result, if it is determined that the on-edge of the setting change switch has not been detected, the process is transferred to step S2020-17, and if it is determined that the on-edge of the setting change switch has been detected, the process is transferred to step S2020-15. ..

(Step S2020-15)
The main CPU 500a increments the set value data by 1.

(Step S2020-17)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the set value data is within the range (1 to 6) that can be set as the set value. As a result, if it is determined that the set value data is within the range, the process is transferred to step S2020-21, and if it is determined that the set value data is not within the range, the process is transferred to step S2020-19.

(Step S2020-19)
The main CPU 500a sets the set value data to 0.

(Step S2020-21)
The main CPU 500a updates the set value data to the value incremented or set in step S2020-15 or step S2020-19.

(Step S2020-23)
The main CPU 500a executes a display data conversion process for displaying the set value on the main credit display unit 430.

(Step S2020-25)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the on-edge of the setting change switch is detected. As a result, if it is determined that the on-edge of the setting change switch has not been detected, the process is transferred to step S2020-31, and if it is determined that the on-edge of the setting change switch has been detected, the process is performed in step S2020-27. To move.

(Step S2020-27)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the setting change switch is on. As a result, if it is determined that the setting change switch is on, the process is transferred to step S2020-27, and if it is determined that the setting change switch is not on, the process is transferred to step S2020-29.

(Step S2020-29)
The main CPU 500a sets a set value change switch interval timer.

(Step S2020-31)
The main CPU 500a executes a timer wait process that waits until the setting change switch interval timer becomes 0.

(Step S2020-33)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the on-edge of the start switch 418 is detected. As a result, if it is determined that the on-edge of the start switch 418 is not detected, the process is transferred to step S2020-9, and if it is determined that the on-edge of the start switch 418 is detected, the process is performed in step S2020-35. To move.

(Step S2020-35)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the setting key is off. As a result, if it is determined that the setting key is off, the process is transferred to step S2020-35, and if it is determined that the setting key is not off, the process is transferred to step S2020-37.

(Step S2020-37)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the setting key is on. As a result, if it is determined that the setting key is on, the process is transferred to step S2020-37, and if it is determined that the setting key is not on, the process is transferred to step S2021.

(Step S2021)
The main CPU 500a executes an initialization start process for starting the initialization start. The initialization start process will be described later.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart illustrating the initialization start process (S2021) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2021-1)
The main CPU 500a sets a setting change end command indicating that the setting value change is completed in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2021-3)
The main CPU 500a sets a setting change status command indicating a status when the setting value change is completed in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2021-5)
The main CPU 500a sets a wait timer at the start of initialization.

(Step S2021-7)
The main CPU 500a executes a timer wait process that waits until the wait timer at the start of initialization becomes 0.

(Step S2021-9)
The main CPU 500a executes a RAM clearing process at the time of setting change to clear another area of the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2021-11)
The main CPU 500a executes a RAM clearing process for clearing the used area to be cleared when the setting is changed in the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2021-13)
The main CPU 500a sets a game state command indicating the current game state in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2100)
The main CPU 500a executes a game start process for starting the game. The game start process will be described later.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart illustrating a state return process (S2030) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2030-1)
The main CPU 500a returns the stack pointer.

(Step S2030-3)
The main CPU 500a executes an unused area clearing process for clearing an unused area in the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2030-5)
The main CPU 500a clears the stack pointer storage buffer.

(Step S2030-7)
The main CPU 500a sets (turns on) the flag after the power is turned off and on.

(Step S2030-9)
The main CPU 500a executes a port input process for updating the image of the input port.

(Step S2030-11)
The main CPU 500a executes an operation target bit extraction process for extracting information on the operation target bit based on the image of the input port updated in step S2030-9.

(Step S2030-13)
The main CPU 500a sets the operation target bit extracted in step S2030-11 as the operation target bit in the previous state.

(Step S2030-15)
The main CPU 500a acquires the motor phases of the reels 410a, 410b, 410c. Here, the motor phase is set as the state of the reels 410a, 410b, 410c. The motor phase indicates the operating state of the reels 410a, 410b, 410c, that is, during acceleration, steady rotation, stop, and standby. Specifically, the 1-byte (storage unit) variable assigned to the motor phase is accelerating = 3, steady rotation = 2, stopped = 1, waiting =, depending on the operating state of the stepping motor 452. It changes to a value such as 0.

(Step S2030-17)
Based on the motor phase acquired in step S2030-15, the main CPU 500a determines whether any of the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c is in steady rotation and acceleration. As a result, when it is determined that none of the reels 410a, 410b, 410c is in steady rotation and acceleration, the process is transferred to step S2030-21, and any of the reels 410a, 410b, 410c is in steady rotation or acceleration. If it is determined to be inside, the process is moved to step S2030-19.

(Step S2030-19)
The main CPU 500a executes rotation error processing for setting the reels 410a, 410b, 410c at the time of error detection.

(Step S2030-21)
The main CPU 500a restores the saved register group.

(Step S2030-23)
The main CPU 500a permits interrupts and ends the state return process. As a result, the main CPU 500a returns to the state immediately before the power is turned off.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating the game start process (S2100) on the main control board 500.

(Step S2100-1)
The main CPU 500a executes a re-game state identification signal output setting process for outputting a re-game state identification signal indicating whether or not the game is re-game.

(Step S2100-3)
The main CPU 500a sets the inserted number indicator output bit off for turning off (turning off) the bit corresponding to the inserted number indicator that displays the inserted number of medals (the number of bets).

(Step S2100-5)
The main CPU 500a executes an output port image set process for updating the output image for the bits set in step S2100-3.

(Step S2100-7)
The main CPU 500a sets a game start wait timer.

(Step S2100-9)
The main CPU 500a executes a timer wait process that waits until the game start wait timer becomes 0.

(Step S2100-11)
The main CPU 500a executes a one-game RAM clearing process that clears an area to be cleared for each game among the areas used in the main RAM 500c.

(Step S2100-13)
The main CPU 500a executes a bonus signal setting process for setting a bonus signal.

(Step S2100-15)
The main CPU 500a executes an edge clearing process for clearing the edge information of the input port image.

(Step S2200)
The main CPU 500a executes a game medal insertion process for accepting the insertion of medals. The game medal insertion process will be described later.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating a game medal insertion process (S2200) on the main control board 500.

(Step S2200-1)
The main CPU 500a executes an error confirmation process for confirming the detection results of various errors.

(Step S2200-3)
The main CPU 500a executes an edge check process for detecting the falling edge (on-edge) of the signal of the input port.

(Step S2200-5)
The main CPU 500a acquires a door opening error detection flag in which 1 is set when the front upper door 404 or the front lower door 406 is opened.

(Step S2200-7)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the front upper door 404 and the front lower door 406 are closed based on the door opening error detection flag acquired in step S2200-5. As a result, when it is determined that the front upper door 404 and the front lower door 406 are closed, the process is moved to step S2200-17, and at least one of the front upper door 404 or the front lower door 406 is not closed. If it is determined, the process is moved to step S2200-9.

(Step S2200-9)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "E8" indicating that at least one of the front upper door 404 and the front lower door 406 is open.

(Step S2200-11)
The main CPU 500a executes an error display, an error sound request, and an error wait process for waiting for error recovery.

(Step S2200-13)
The main CPU 500a executes a set value confirmation process for confirming the set value.

(Step S2200-15)
The main CPU 500a executes an edge clearing process for clearing the edge information of the input port image.

(Step S2200-17)
The main CPU 500a executes a credit button check process for refunding stored medals when a credit switch (not shown) for refunding stored medals is pressed.

(Step S2200-19)
The main CPU 500a executes a game medal insertion button-related process for betting medals. Here, when the bet switch 416 is pressed, the stored (credit) medals are bet up to a specified number, and the stored number is subtracted by the number of bets. Further, when medals are inserted through the medal insertion slot 414a, medals are bet up to a specified number, and when more medals are inserted than the specified number, the number of medals is added to the stored number.

(Step S2200-21)
The main CPU 500a executes a game medal acquisition process for confirming whether or not the number of inserted cards is a specified number.

(Step S2200-23)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the number of input sheets is not the specified number based on the confirmation result in step S2200-21. As a result, when it is determined that the number of inserted sheets is not the specified number, the process is transferred to step S2200-1, and when it is determined that the number of inserted sheets is the specified number, the process is transferred to step S2200-25.

(Step S2200-25)
The main CPU 500a sets a start indicator output bit for turning on (lights) the start indicator (not shown) indicating whether or not the operation of the start switch 418 is enabled.

(Step S2200-27)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the falling edge (pressing) of the start switch 418 is detected. As a result, if it is determined that the falling edge of the start switch 418 has not been detected, the process is shifted to step S2200-1. If it is determined that the falling edge of the start switch 418 has been detected, step S2200 is performed. Move the process to -29.

(Step S2200-29)
The main CPU 500a clears the main payout display unit buffer in order to clear the display of the main payout display unit 432.

(Step S2200-31)
The main CPU 500a executes a re-game state identification signal clearing process for clearing the re-game state identification signal.

(Step S2200-33)
The main CPU 500a executes a blocker blockage preprocessing for turning off (turning off) the start indicator.

(Step S2200-35)
The main CPU 500a sets a lever pressing command indicating that the start switch 418 has been pressed in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2300)
The main CPU 500a executes an internal lottery process for performing a winning type lottery. The internal lottery process will be described later.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating the internal lottery process (S2300) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2300-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires the set value data.

(Step S2300-3)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "EC" indicating a set value abnormality error.

(Step S2300-5)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the set value data acquired in step S2300-1 is abnormal. As a result, if it is determined that the set value data is abnormal, the process is transferred to step S2011, and if it is determined that the set value data is not abnormal, the process is transferred to step S2300-7.

(Step S2300-7)
The main CPU 500a acquires a winning type lottery random number updated by the random number generator 500d.

(Step S2300-9)
The main CPU 500a executes a state offset acquisition process for acquiring an offset value related to the game state.

(Step S2300-11)
The main CPU 500a sets the address of the internal lottery area definition table (winning type lottery table).

(Step S2300-13)
The main CPU 500a sets the value indicated by the address obtained by adding the offset value acquired in step S2300-9 to the address set in step S2300-11 as the initial value of the winning area. Here, the first winning area in the winning type lottery table in the current gaming state is set as the initial value.

(Step S2300-15)
The main CPU 500a acquires lottery data which is a numerical value indicating a winning range of the winning area, and executes a lottery data acquisition process of shifting the winning area by one.

(Step S2300-17)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not to perform the winning type lottery. As a result, if it is determined that the winning type lottery is not performed, the process is transferred to step S2300-21, and if it is determined that the winning type lottery is performed, the process is transferred to step S2300-19.

(Step S2300-19)
The main CPU 500a subtracts the lottery data from the random number value.

(Step S2300-21)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the subtraction result in step S2300-19 is negative, that is, whether the winning area is won by the winning type lottery. As a result, if it is determined that the lottery for the winning type has been won, the process is transferred to step S2400, and if it is determined that the lottery for the winning type has not been won, the process is transferred to step S2300-23.

(Step S2300-23)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the winning type lottery has ended. As a result, if it is determined that the winning type lottery is not completed, the process is transferred to step S2300-15, and if it is determined that the winning type lottery is completed, the process is transferred to step S2300-25.

(Step S2300-25)
The main CPU 500a clears the trigger combination type.

(Step S2400)
The main CPU 500a executes a symbol code setting process for setting a symbol code based on the winning area and the game state. The symbol code setting process will be described later.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating a symbol code setting process (S2400) on the main control board 500.

(Step S2400-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires the winning area won in step S2300, and executes a game state setting process for setting the game state to the internal middle game state when the acquired winning area includes a bonus combination.

(Step S2400-3)
The main CPU 500a sets the winning area acquired in step S2400-1 as the stop control number.

(Step S2400-5)
The main CPU 500a determines (sets) the winning type based on the winning area acquired in step S2400-1.

(Step S2400-7)
Based on the stop control number set in step S2400-3, the main CPU 500a executes a symbol code initial setting process for setting a symbol that can be displayed and a symbol code that indicates a symbol to be pulled in.

(Step S2400-9)
The main CPU 500a executes a display symbol bit initial value setting process for setting the display symbol bit.

(Step S2400-11)
The main CPU 500a executes an execution flag setting process that sets an execution flag, performs various processes related to the effect state, processes related to the auxiliary effect, and the like.

(Step S2400-13)
The main CPU 500a sets the effect command, which is a command related to the advantageous section, in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2400-15)
The main CPU 500a sets a winning information command indicating the winning type in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2400-17)
The main CPU 500a confirms the timer between one game.

(Step S2400-19)
The main CPU 500a sets a pre-rotation command indicating that the reels 410a, 410b, 410c are before rotation in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2400-21)
The main CPU 500a executes an excitation release waiting process that waits for the excitation release of the stepping motor 452.

(Step S2400-23)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the timer for one game is not 0. As a result, if it is determined that the 1-game timer is not 0, the process is transferred to step S2400-23, and if it is determined that the 1-game timer is 0, the process is transferred to step S2400-25.

(Step S2400-25)
The main CPU 500a executes a spinning start process for starting the rotation of the reels 410a, 410b, 410c. Here, the motor phases of the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c are set during acceleration to start the rotation of each reel, or the timer between games is set to a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds.

(Step S2400-27)
The main CPU 500a sets a rotation start command indicating that the rotation of the reels 410a, 410b, 410c has started in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2500)
The main CPU 500a executes a rotating cylinder rotating process, which is a process during the rotation of the reels 410a, 410b, 410c. The processing during rotation of the rotating cylinder will be described later.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating the processing during rotation (S2500) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2500-1)
The main CPU 500a sets the stop indicator output bit off (output image) in order to turn off (turn off) the bits corresponding to the indicators (not shown) of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c. Here, the stop indicator output bit is composed of a 3-bit bit string, and each bit is associated with the emission color of the three stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c, respectively, and is represented by blue = 1 and red = 0. Will be done.

(Step S2500-3)
The main CPU 500a executes an output port image set process for updating the output image for the bits set in step S2500-1.

(Step S2500-5)
The main CPU 500a executes an error confirmation process for confirming the detection results of various errors.

(Step S2500-7)
The main CPU 500a refers to the index flag and acquires the indexes of the rotating reels 410a, 410b, 410c. The index flag is set only after the reels 410a, 410b, 410c have reached the constant speed rotation speed. In other words, the fact that the index flag is set means that the reels 410a, 410b, 410c rotate at a constant speed. It also indicates that the speed has been reached.

(Step S2500-9)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the index flags of all the reels 410a, 410b, and 410c have been detected. As a result, if it is determined that all the index flags have not been detected, the process is transferred to step S2500-1, and if it is determined that all the index flags have been detected, the process is transferred to step S2500-11.

(Step S2500-11)
The main CPU 500a acquires a stop rotation bit indicating the reels 410a, 410b, 410c that have stopped or started to stop. Here, the stop rotation bit is composed of a bit string of 3 bits, and each bit is associated with any of the three reels 410a, 410b, 410c, and the constant speed state = 1, acceleration state, and deceleration state. Or it is represented by the stopped state = 0.

(Step S2500-13)
The main CPU 500a saves the stop rotating bit acquired in step S2500-11 as a rotating rotating flag.

(Step S2500-15)
The main CPU 500a sets the stop indicator output bit on (output image) in order to turn on (turn off) the bits corresponding to the indicators (not shown) of the stop switches 420a, 420b, 420c.

(Step S2500-17)
The main CPU 500a acquires an image of the input port 0 and executes an operation target bit extraction process for extracting an operation target bit from the acquired image. Here, the operation target bit is composed of a 3-bit bit string, and each bit is associated with any of the three stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c, and is operated = 1, not operated. It is represented by = 0.

(Step S2500-19)
The main CPU 500a calculates the logical product of the rotating cylinder rotating flag acquired in step S2500-13 and the operation target bit extracted in step S2500-17. Here, if the reel 410 is rotating and the stop switch 420 corresponding to the reel is operated, that is, if the operated stop switch 420 corresponds to the reel 410 that is effectively rotating. , The logical product is 1.

(Step S2500-21)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the logical product calculated in step S2500-19 is 0, that is, whether the stop switch 420 corresponding to the rotating reel 410 is not operated. As a result, when it is determined that the stop switch 420 corresponding to the rotating reel 410 is not operated, the process is transferred to step S2500-3, and the stop switch 420 corresponding to the rotating reel 410 is operated. If it is determined that the processing is performed, the process is moved to step S2500-23.

(Step S2500-23)
The main CPU 500a acquires an output image including the stop indicator output bit, and calculates the logical product of the acquired output image and the logical product calculated in step S2500-19. Here, when the operated stop switch 420 is lit in red, the bit of the logical product is 0, and when it is lit in blue, the bit of the logical product is 1.

(Step S2500-25)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the logical product calculated in step S2500-23 is 0, that is, whether the operated stop switch 420 is lit in red. As a result, if it is determined that the operated stop switch 420 is lit in red, the process is transferred to step S2500-1, and if it is determined that the operated stop switch 420 is not lit in red, step S2500-. The process is transferred to 27.

(Step S2500-27)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the operated stop switch 420 is not valid. As a result, if it is determined that the operated stop switch 420 is not valid, the process is transferred to step S2500-1, and if it is determined that the operated stop switch 420 is valid, the process is performed in step S2500-29. Transfer. Here, it is determined whether or not there is only one operated stop switch 420. Then, when it is determined that the number of operated stop switches 420 is one, the process is transferred to step S2500-29, and when it is determined that the number of operated stop switches 420 is not one, that is, two or more. The process is transferred to step S2500-1.

(Step S2500-29)
The main CPU 500a executes a stop control rotation cylinder setting process for acquiring various parameters for stopping the reel 410 corresponding to the operated stop switch 420.

(Step S2500-31)
The main CPU 500a disables interrupts.

(Step S2500-33)
The main CPU 500a executes a pressing reference position acquisition process for deriving the symbol number of the symbol located on the effective line A as the pressing reference position.

(Step S2500-35)
The main CPU 500a executes a sliding frame number acquisition process for determining the number of sliding frames of the reel 410.

(Step S2600)
The main CPU 500a executes a spinning stop process for stopping the reel 410 corresponding to the operated stop switch 420. The rotation stop processing will be described later.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart illustrating the rotation stop processing (S2600) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2600-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires the pressing reference position derived in step S2500-35.

(Step S2600-3)
The main CPU 500a calculates the stop request number by correcting the number of sliding frames determined in step S2500-37 with respect to the pressing reference position acquired in step S2600-1.

(Step S2600-5)
The main CPU 500a sets (sets to 1) the stop request flag. The stop request flag is a flag for requesting the stop processing of the target reel 410 from the programs operating in parallel, and by setting the stop request flag to 1, the symbol corresponding to the stop request number is valid. It is possible to stop on line A. The stop request flag and the above stop request number are read by a program operating in parallel, and the reel 410 is stopped. When the stop processing is completed, the stop request flag is reset to 0 (OFF) by the program.

(Step S2600-7)
The main CPU 500a allows interrupts.

(Step S2600-9)
The main CPU 500a sets a stop information command indicating the stop order of the reels 410 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2600-11)
The main CPU 500a sets the stop indicator output bit off (output image) in order to turn off (turn off) the bit corresponding to the indicator (not shown) of the stop switch 420.

(Step S2600-13)
The main CPU 500a executes an output port image set process for updating the output image for the bits set in step S2600-11.

(Step S2600-15)
The main CPU 500a executes a display symbol bit setting process for setting the display symbol bit.

(Step S2600-17)
The main CPU 500a executes the next reel setting preprocessing for stopping the next reel 410.

(Step S2600-19)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the stop processing of all reels 410 has been completed. As a result, if it is determined that the stop processing of all reels 410 has not been completed, the process is transferred to step S2500, and if it is determined that the stop processing of all reels 410 has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2600-21. Move the process.

(Step S2600-21)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the stop request flag is on for any of the reels 410, that is, whether all the reels 410 have been stopped. As a result, if it is determined that all the reels 410 have not been stopped, the process is transferred to step S2600-21, and if it is determined that all the reels 410 have been stopped, the process is transferred to step S2600-23.

(Step S2600-23)
The main CPU 500a executes an error confirmation process for confirming the detection results of various errors.

(Step S2600-25)
The main CPU 500a executes an operation target bit extraction process for extracting information on the operation target bit.

(Step S2600-27)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the stop switch 420 is pressed based on the operation target bit acquired in step S2600-25. As a result, if it is determined that the stop switch 420 is pressed, the process is transferred to step S2600-23, and if it is determined that the stop switch 420 is not pressed, the process is transferred to step S2700.

(Step S2700)
The main CPU 500a executes a display determination process for determining a winning combination. The display determination process will be described later.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart illustrating the display determination process (S2700) on the main control board 500.

(Step S2700-1)
The main CPU 500a clears the buffer of the main payout display unit 432.

(Step S2700-3)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not a display determination abnormality has occurred depending on whether or not the symbol combination displayed on the effective line A and the symbol combination permitted to be displayed on the effective line A match. Execute the detection process.

(Step S2700-5)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "EE" indicating that the display determination is abnormal (error).

(Step S2700-7)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the display determination is abnormal based on the determination result in step S2700-3. As a result, if it is determined that the display determination is abnormal, the process is transferred to step S2011, and if it is determined that the display determination is not abnormal, the process is transferred to step S2700-9.

(Step S2700-9)
The main CPU 500a executes a display symbol identification generation process for determining a winning combination based on the symbol combination stopped (displayed) on the valid line A.

(Step S2700-11)
The main CPU 500a sets 0 as the initial value of the number of payouts.

(Step S2700-13)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the small winning combination has won. As a result, if it is determined that the small winning combination has won, the process is transferred to step S2700-15, and if it is determined that the small winning combination has not won, the processing is transferred to step S2700-35.

(Step S2700-15)
The main CPU 500a turns on the winning flag indicating that the small winning combination has won.

(Step S2700-17)
The main CPU 500a executes a payout number setting process for setting the payout number according to the winning small winning combination.

(Step S2700-19)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not it is an advantageous section. As a result, if it is determined that the section is not advantageous, the process is transferred to step S2800, and if it is determined that the section is advantageous, the process is transferred to step S2700-21.

(Step S2700-21)
The main CPU 500a acquires the value of the advantageous section MY counter that counts the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section.

(Step S2700-23)
The main CPU 500a adds the number of payouts to the value of the advantageous section MY counter acquired in step S2700-23.

(Step S2700-25)
The main CPU 500a acquires the number of input sheets of the game.

(Step S2700-27)
The main CPU 500a subtracts the number of input sheets from the value added in step S2700-23.

(Step S2700-29)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the subtraction result in step S2700-27 is not negative. As a result, if it is determined that the subtraction result is not negative, the process is transferred to step S2700-33, and if it is determined that the subtraction result is negative, the process is transferred to step S2700-31.

(Step S2700-31)
The main CPU 500a clears (sets to 0) the value of the advantageous section MY counter.

(Step S2700-33)
The main CPU 500a updates the value of the advantageous section MY counter to the value subtracted in the step S2700-27 or the value cleared in the step S2700-31.

(Step S2700-35)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the replay combination has won a prize. As a result, if it is determined that the replay combination has not won a prize, the process is transferred to step S2800, and if it is determined that the replay combination has won a prize, the process is transferred to steps S2700-37.

(Step S2700-37)
The main CPU 500a sets the number of input sheets to the number of payout sheets.

(Step S2700-39)
The main CPU 500a turns on the flag during re-game operation.

(Step S2700-41)
The main CPU 500a sets the number of automatically input sheets.

(Step S2800)
The main CPU 500a executes a payout process for paying out medals. The payout process will be described later.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart illustrating the payout process (S2800) in the main control board 500.

(Step S280-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires the re-game operation flag.

(Step S2800-3)
The main CPU 500a sets a payout start command indicating that the payout of medals has started in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2800-5)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the replay combination has won a prize based on the replay operating flag acquired in step S280-1. As a result, if it is determined that the replay combination has won a prize, the process is transferred to step S2800-41, and if it is determined that the replay combination has not won a prize, the process is transferred to step S2800-7.

(Step S2800-7)
The main CPU 500a executes a main display display process for displaying 0 on the main payout display unit 432.

(Step S2800-9)
The main CPU 500a determines that there is no payout (the number of payouts is 0). As a result, if it is determined that there is no payout, the process is transferred to step S2800-35, and if it is determined that there is a payout, the process is transferred to step S2800-11.

(Step S2800-11)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the number of stored sheets is 50 or more. As a result, when it is determined that the number of stored sheets is 50 or more, the process is transferred to step S2800-13, and when it is determined that the number of stored sheets is not 50 or more, the process is transferred to step S2800-15.

(Step S2800-13)
The main CPU 500a executes a medal payout device control process for paying out one medal from the medal payout device 442, and shifts the process to step S2800-23.

(Step S2800-15)
The main CPU 500a sets a payout start interval timer.

(Step S2800-17)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the payout start timer is not 0, that is, at the time of the first payout. As a result, if it is determined that it is the first payout, the process is transferred to step S2800-21, and if it is determined that it is not the first payout, the process is transferred to step S2800-19.

(Step S2800-19)
The main CPU 500a executes a timer wait process that waits until the payout start interval timer becomes 0.

(Step S2800-21)
The main CPU 500a increments the number of stored sheets by one.

(Step S2800-23)
The main CPU 500a sets a payout execution command indicating that one medal has been paid out in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2800-25)
The main CPU 500a executes a main display pre-display processing for displaying the number of payouts already paid out on the main payout display unit 432.

(Step S2800-27)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not it is in the bonus game state. As a result, if it is determined that the game is not in the bonus game state, the process is transferred to step S2800-31, and if it is determined that the game is in the bonus game state, the process is transferred to step S2800-29.

(Step S2800-29)
The main CPU 500a increments the number of medals acquired during the bonus operation, which is the number of medals paid out in the bonus game state.

(Step S2800-31)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the payout of the number of medals to be paid out has been completed. As a result, if it is determined that the payout has not been completed, the process is transferred to step S2800-11, and if it is determined that the payout has been completed, the process is transferred to step S2800-33.

(Step S2800-33)
The main CPU 500a executes a payout end process for ending the payout of medals.

(Step S2800-35)
The main CPU 500a determines whether an over error has been detected. As a result, if it is determined that no over error has been detected, the process is transferred to step S2800-41, and if it is determined that an over error has been detected, the process is transferred to step S2800-37.

(Step S2800-37)
The main CPU 500a sets an error code "E5" indicating an over error.

(Step S2800-39)
The main CPU 500a executes an error display, an error sound request, and an error wait process for waiting for error recovery.

(Step S2800-41)
The main CPU 500a sets a payout end command indicating that the payout of medals has been completed in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2900)
The main CPU 500a executes a game transition process that performs a game state transition, a process of managing an advantageous section, and the like. The game transition process will be described later.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart illustrating the game transition process (S2900) in the main control board 500.

(Step S2900-1)
The main CPU 500a acquires the re-game operating flag, and based on the acquired re-game operating flag, turns on or off the bit corresponding to the replay display (not shown) indicating that the next game is the re-game. Therefore, the stop indicator output bit off (output image) is set, and the replay indicator control process that updates the output bit of the set output image is executed.

(Step S2900-3)
When the bonus combination is won, the main CPU 500a executes a bonus operation symbol display process for setting various parameters for controlling the bonus game state.

(Step S2900-5)
In the bonus game state, the main CPU 500a executes a bonus operation end process for shifting the game state to the non-internal game state when the number of acquired cards during the bonus operation reaches a predetermined number.

(Step S2900-7)
The main CPU 500a executes an advantageous section update process for managing the advantageous section.

(Step S2900-9)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the next game is in the AT effect state. As a result, if it is determined that the next game is not in the AT effect state, the process is transferred to step S2900-15, and if it is determined that the next game is in the AT effect state, the process is transferred to step S2900-11.

(Step S2900-11)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not it is in the bonus game state. As a result, if it is determined that the game is not in the bonus game state, the process is transferred to step S2900-15, and if it is determined that the game is in the bonus game state, the process is transferred to step S2900-13.

(Step S2900-13)
The main CPU 500a sets the advantage lamp flag for lighting the section indicator 460 on.

(Step S2900-15)
The main CPU 500a executes an effect command setting process for setting an effect command, which is a command related to an advantageous section, in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2900-17)
The main CPU 500a sets a game end command indicating that one game has ended in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2900-19)
The main CPU 500a executes a terminal board signal output process for outputting an external signal.

(Step S2900-21)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the effect wait timer set when ending the advantageous section in step S2900-7 is not 0. As a result, if it is determined that the effect wait timer is not 0, the process is transferred to step S2900-21, and if it is determined that the effect wait timer is 0, the process is transferred to step S2900-23.

(Step S2900-23)
The main CPU 500a sets a game state command indicating the game state in the transmission buffer.

(Step S2900-25)
The main CPU 500a sets a game start command indicating the start of the next game in the transmission buffer, and shifts the process to step S2100.

One game is executed through a series of processes from step S2100 to step S2900. After that, steps S2100 to S2900 will be repeated.

Next, the power outage save processing and the timer interrupt processing in the main control board 500 will be described.

(Evacuation processing when the power of the main control board 500 is turned off)
FIG. 97 is a flowchart illustrating the evacuation process when the power is turned off in the main control board 500. The main CPU 500a monitors the power supply cutoff detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value, it interrupts and executes the power failure save processing.

(Step S3000-1)
When the power cutoff warning signal is input, the main CPU 500a saves the register.

(Step S3000-3)
The main CPU 500a checks the power off warning signal.

(Step S3000-5)
The main CPU 500a determines whether or not the power supply cutoff warning signal is detected. As a result, if it is determined that the power off warning signal has been detected, the process is transferred to step S3000-11, and if it is determined that the power off warning signal has not been detected, the process is transferred to step S3000-7. ..

(Step S3000-7)
The main CPU 500a restores the register.

(Step S3000-9)
The main CPU 500a performs a process for permitting an interrupt, and ends the save process when the power is turned off.

(Step S3000-11)
The main CPU 500a executes an output port clearing process for stopping the output of the output port.

(Step S3000-13)
The main CPU 500a executes an evacuation process when the power is turned off for another area.

(Step S3000-15)
The main CPU 500a executes the RAM protection setting process necessary for prohibiting access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S3000-17)
The main CPU 500a sets a predetermined number of times of power failure detection signal detection to the counter value of the loop counter in order to set the power failure occurrence monitoring time.

(Step S3000-19)
The main CPU 500a subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter set in step S3000-17.

(Step S3000-21)
The main CPU 500a determines whether the counter value of the loop counter is not 0. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3000-19, and if it is determined that the counter value is 0, the process proceeds to the CPU initialization process (step S1000) described above.

When the power is actually cut off, the operation of the slot machine 400 is stopped while looping from step S3000-19 to step S3000-21.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board 500)
FIG. 98 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing on the main control board 500. The main control board 500 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit that generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (1.49 ms in the simultaneous rotation reference example, hereinafter referred to as “1.49 ms”). Then, when a clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, it interrupts and the following timer interrupt processing is executed.

(Step S3100-1)
The main CPU 500a saves the register.

(Step S3100-3)
The main CPU 500a clears the interrupt flag.

(Step S3100-5)
The main CPU 500a reads various input port images and executes port input processing for accurately acquiring the latest switch state.

(Step S3100-7)
The main CPU 500a outputs the set output image to the output port, and displays the main credit display unit 430, the main payout display unit 432, the number of input sheets display, the start display, the stop switches 420a, 420b, and 420c, and the replay display. The dynamic port output process for controlling the lighting of the device and the section display 460 is executed.

(Step S3100-9)
The main CPU 500a updates the timer interrupt phase. The timer interrupt phase is any of 0 to 3, and here, 1 is added when the timer interrupt phase is 0, 1, and 2, and 0 when the timer interrupt phase is 3. Be changed.

(Step S3100-11)
The main CPU 500a performs a subcommand transmission process for transmitting the command stored in the transmission buffer to the subcontrol board 502.

(Step S3100-13)
The main CPU 500a executes a stepping motor control process for controlling the stepping motor 452.

(Step S3100-15)
The main CPU 500a executes an output port image output process for outputting an output image to be output to the medal payout device 442.

(Step S3100-17)
The main CPU 500a executes a random number update process for updating various random numbers.

(Step S3100-19)
The main CPU 500a executes an fraud monitoring process for detecting an error in order to output an external signal (external signals 4, 5) corresponding to the error to the outside.

(Step S3100-21)
The main CPU 500a executes a module (subroutine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing phase updated in step S3100-9. Here, the timer interrupt processing phase is set to any of 0 to 3, and one module corresponding to each of the timer interrupt processing phases 0 to 3 is provided (four in total), and 1 One module will be executed once every four times (every 5.96 ms) of timer interrupt processing. For example, a module that executes time monitoring processing for subtracting various timers is associated with one timer interrupt processing phase.

(Step S3100-23)
The main CPU 500a executes a test signal output process for outputting a test signal to the outside.

(Step S3100-25)
The main CPU 500a reads various input port images and executes port input processing for accurately acquiring the latest switch state.

(Step S3100-27)
The main CPU 500a restores the register.

(Step S3100-29)
The main CPU 300a permits interrupts and ends the timer interrupt process.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 500 and the sub control board 502 are arranged so as to share the functional part for advancing the game, but the functional part of the main control board 500 is assigned to the sub control board 502. Alternatively, the functional parts of the sub-control board 502 may be arranged on the main control board 500, or all the functional parts may be arranged together on one control board.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, only one type of AT effect state is provided, but for example, a plurality of types of AT effect states are provided, such as a special zone for adding the number of continuous games in the AT effect state. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game is performed using medals as the game value, but the game value may be electrical information (so-called medalless). In this case, when the winning combination wins, the amount of value corresponding to the winning combination may be given to the player by electrical information.

Further, each process performed by the main control board 500 and the sub control board 502 described above does not necessarily have to be processed in chronological order in the order described in the flowchart, and may include parallel or subroutine processing.

Further, each process performed by the main control board 500 and the sub control board 502 described above does not necessarily have to be processed in chronological order in the order described in the flowchart, and may include parallel or subroutine processing.

<Configuration around the CPU of the main control board>
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the electrical connection around the main CPU 300a. The main CPU 300a includes a CPU core 700 and a bus controller 702. The CPU core 700 controls the bus controller 702 through a bus control signal (Bus Cont) output from the BC terminal, reads data from the main ROM 300b, the main RAM 300c, or the input / output unit 704, or outputs data to the main RAM 300c. Write. Here, as the CPU 300a, a microprocessor sold by LETech, which is based on a Z80 series CPU, is used. Here, the main CPU 300a, main, ROM 300b, and main RAM 300c of the pachinko machine will be described, but it goes without saying that the main CPU 500a, main, ROM 500b, and main RAM 500c of the slot machine 400 can be replaced.

For example, when reading data from the main ROM 300b, the main RAM 300c, or the input / output unit 704, the bus controller 702 outputs a 16-bit address (A [16]) signal, and the main ROM 300b, through the decoders 706a, 706b, and 706c, While specifying either the main RAM 300c or the input / output unit 704, the read (RD) signal is controlled to read the data (D [8]) signal from the main ROM 300b, the main RAM 300c, or the input / output unit 704. .. When writing data to the main RAM 300c or the input / output unit 704, the bus controller 702 outputs an address (A [16]) signal and a data (D [8]) signal, and outputs the main RAM 300c through the decoders 706b and 706c. , Or the input / output unit 704 is specified, and the write (WR) signal is controlled to write a data (D [8]) signal to the main RAM 300c or the input / output unit 704.

Here, as will be described later, the address space of the input / output unit 704 is integrated with the address space of the main ROM 300b and the main RAM 300c. Therefore, conventionally, the memory request (MRQ) terminal and the I / O request (IORQ) terminal for outputting a signal for specifying which of the memory and the I / O to access are not provided. By reassigning these two terminals to any other signal, the degree of freedom in program development can be increased.

Further, in the CPU core 700, an interrupt / wait (INT / WAIT) signal that triggers the start of interrupt processing, an unmaskable interrupt (NMI) signal that can execute interrupt processing with the highest priority, and a bus signal are set to high impedance. An external signal such as a transitionable bus request (BUSRQ) signal is also input.

FIG. 100 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the CPU core 700. The CPU core 700 includes an external input unit 710, a state control unit 712, a central control unit 714, a register unit 716, and an arithmetic logic unit (ALU) 718. The external input unit 710 receives an external signal and outputs control information based on the external signal to the state control unit 712 and the central control unit 714.

The state control unit 712 manages and transitions the internal state (RESET, instruction fetch, instruction decoder, operation, memory load, memory store, HALT, etc.) to determine the operating state of the CPU core 700, and is based on the internal state. The control information is output to the central control unit 714.

The central control unit 714 extracts an operation code (instruction) from the input data (DI [8]) input via the bus controller 702, and controls the ALU718 based on the command decoded by the instruction decoder. Further, the central control unit 714 acquires necessary information from each register of the register unit 716 or updates each register by a decoded command.

The register unit 716 includes selector ports 722a, 722b, 722c, input side bank selector 724, first register bank 726, second register bank 728, output side bank selector 730, address port 732, and individual register 734. In the individual register 734, a 16-bit program counter (PC) indicating the address of the program to be executed next, an 8-bit interrupt (I) register used in the interrupt mode, and an operation code fetch cycle are counted. It includes a bit refresh (R) register and an 8-bit interrupt permission (IFF) register that controls interrupt permission / prohibition.

In addition, the register unit 716 generates random numbers for acquiring various random number values (big hit determination random number, hit symbol random number, reach group determination random number, reach mode determination random number, fluctuation pattern random number, hit determination random number) related to the big win lottery. A device (not shown) is associated with each other, and a random number value latched via an input port (FE73h to FE9Ch) is acquired.

The random number generator operates with a system clock (a clock obtained by dividing the external input by two) and generates a random number less than a predetermined maximum value. The random number generator is a random number generator that can set the maximum value of random numbers. As a maximum value setting random number generator, a maximum value of 16 bits can be set, and a maximum value of 4 channels and 8 bits can be set. Eight channels of possible random number generation are prepared. Here, the 16-bit maximum value setting random number generator can be selected with a random number update cycle in the range of 32 to 47 clocks, and the maximum value setting range can be set in the range of 256 to 65535. In addition, the 8-bit maximum value setting random number generator can select the random number update cycle in the range of 16 to 31 clocks, the maximum value setting range can be set in the range of 16 to 255 in 4 channels, and in the other 4 channels. It can be set in the range of 64 to 255. In addition, as a maximum value fixed random number generator that is a random number generator with a fixed maximum value of random numbers, there are 4 channels of random number generation that can set the maximum value of 16 bits, and random number generation that can set the maximum value of 8 bits. 8 channels are prepared. Here, the 16-bit maximum value fixed random number generator has a random number update cycle fixed to 1 clock and a maximum value fixed to 65535. Further, the 8-bit maximum value fixed random number generator has a random number update cycle fixed at 1 clock and a maximum value fixed at 255.

If there are not enough types of random numbers, the random number value obtained from the hardware random number generator (random number generator) is multiplied by a predetermined number in the program and divided to generate another random number (software). Random number generator) is also possible.

FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating a register configuration. The first register bank 726 and the second register bank 728 both have 8-bit registers (Q, U, A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L) and 16-bit registers (IX, IY, SP) is provided. Further, the registers of the first register bank 726 and the second register bank 728 include a front register and a back register. The CPUs 300a and 500a can access only the front register of the register bank indicated by the register bank designation register RB in the F register, and cannot access the back register.

Of the registers shown in FIG. 101, the Q register is an 8-bit dedicated register with extended specifications for gaming machines. The Q register is fixed at F0h and is used for accessing the main RAM 300c of F000h to F0FFh. The U register is an 8-bit dedicated register with extended specifications for gaming machines. The U register is fixed to FEh and is used for accessing built-in devices (timer, random number generator, external input / output circuit, etc.) connected to the input / output units 704 of FE00h to FEFFh. The A register is used for arithmetic processing and data transfer. The F register is an 8-bit flag register that holds various calculation results. Here, each bit of the F register is the most significant bit (MSB:) as shown in FIG. 101. From Most Significant Bit) to the least significant bit (LSB: Least Significant Bit), S is a sign flag set to 1 when the calculation result is negative, and Z is 1 when all bits are 0 as a result of the calculation. It is a zero flag (first zero flag) set to, and TZ is an extended specification for gaming machines that is set to 1 (changes in value) when all bits are 0 by executing a data transfer instruction (LD; load). It is a specific bit flag (second zero flag) and is sometimes called a timer flag. H is a half-carry flag that the programmer cannot participate in, and RB is the current register bank (first register bank 726 = 0, th). 2 Register bank monitor indicating register bank 728 = 1), P / V is a parity overflow flag, N is an addition / subtraction flag that the programmer cannot participate in, and C is a carry or borrow as a result of the operation. It is a carry flag in which 1 is sometimes set. The F register constitutes the A register and the pair register AF.

The B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, and L register are 8-bit general-purpose registers, and each constitutes a 16-bit pair register BC, DE, and HL whose combination is predetermined. .. The IX register and the IY register are 16-bit dedicated registers for index addressing. The SP (stack pointer) register is 16 bits and stores an address that serves as a stack pointer. Q'register, A'register, F'register, B'register, C'register, D'register, E'register, H'register, L'register, IX'register, IY'register are Q register, A register , F register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register, IX register, IY register. And F'registers make up pair register AF', B'register and C'register make up pair register BC', D'register and E'register make up pair register DE', H'register and L'register. The'registers make up the pair register HL'. The back register can be used by selecting and exchanging either of the front register and the register by a replacement instruction or the like. On the other hand, the register U and the register SP are single registers having no back register. In this way, the back register functions as a stack area of the front register when the interrupt process occurs.

By the way, as described above, in the main control boards 300 and 500, the main CPU 300a controls the progress of the game in cooperation with the main RAM 300c based on the program stored in the main ROM 300b. The program for executing these functional units is arranged in a predetermined area (used area) of the main ROM 300b and the main RAM 300c.

FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing a memory map. Since the memory map in the pachinko machine has already been described with reference to FIG. 5, the memory map of the slot machine 400 will be described here. A memory space of 0000h to 3FFFh (12kbyte) is allocated to the main ROM 500b, a memory space of F000h to F3FFh (1kbyte) is allocated to the main RAM 500c, and the input / output unit 704 is allocated to the input / output unit 704 of FE00h to FEFFh (256byte). Memory space is allocated. The instruction code of the program is written in assembler language. Here, the program is composed of an instruction code, is read by a computer, and can realize a predetermined process in cooperation with data and a work area.

A used area is allocated to the memory space of the main ROM 500b from 0000h to 1DF3h. The used area is an area for storing programs and data for executing a game control process that controls the progress of the game. Specifically, in the memory space (control area) limited to 0000h to 11FFh (4.5kbyte), the initialization means 600, the betting means 602, the winning type lottery means 604, the reel control means 606, the determination means 608, and the payout control. The instruction code of the program for executing the game control process for controlling the progress of the game by operating the means 610, the game state control means 612, the effect state control means 614, and the command transmission means 616 is stored, and 1200h to 1DF3h (3). Data used in the game control processing program is stored in the memory space (data area) limited to 0.0 kbyte). A comment area is allocated to the memory space of 1E00h to 1FFFh, and a program management area is allocated to the memory space of 3FC0h to 3FFFh. Further, another area (unused area) is allocated to the memory space of 2000h to 3FBFh. As will be described later, another area is an area for storing programs and data that are not defined to be stored in the used area. Specifically, in the memory space of 2000h to 3FBFh, instruction codes and program data of a program that executes a part or all of the game machine test processing and security-related processing that do not affect the progress of the game are stored. It is stored. The test process for a game machine is a test process for the slot machine 400 described in the connection specifications (fourth edition) of the test machine for a rotating game machine. The security-related process is a process for identifying an abnormal state for the purpose of preventing fraud by a third party or finding a defect, and includes, for example, the determination of the backup flag and the execution of the checksum described above. There is no limitation on the storage capacity in another area, and in the example of FIG. 102, it can be freely allocated to a storage area other than the used area, the comment area, and the program management area.

As described above, the main CPU 500a may perform not only game control processing but also game machine test processing and security-related processing. However, the storage capacity of the used area is predetermined. For example, as shown in FIG. 102, the control area is limited to 4.5 kbytes and the data area is limited to 3.0 kbytes. Therefore, if not only the game control process but also the program and data of the game machine test process and the security-related process are arranged in the used area, the storage area for performing the game control process is limited accordingly. Here, the program (program used) and data for executing the game control process must be stored in the used area, but do not affect the progress of the game other than the game control process (not directly related). Programs (separate programs) and data for executing processing (test processing for gaming machines, security-related processing, etc.) can be stored in both the used area and the other area. Therefore, at least a part of the program or data for executing the backup flag determination process and the checksum execution process, which are the processes corresponding to the security-related process, is stored in a storage area different from the used area (other than the used area). It is described in another area that is a part of it.

When the process executed in the used area (here, the game control process) and the process that does not necessarily have to be performed in the used area (here, the security-related process) are mixed in this way, the game control process To store the program (program to be used) and data for executing the game in the used area, and to execute the process (security-related process) that does not affect the progress of the game other than the game control process, which does not have to be performed in the used area. It is desirable to store the program (separate program) and data in another area. By dividing the storage area into a plurality of storage areas in this way, a margin is created in the storage area (capacity) of the used area by the amount of the program moved to another area. Therefore, it is possible to allocate the used area to the game control process (used program) accordingly.

However, even when the storage area is divided into the used area and another area as described above, the fairness of the gaming machine must be guaranteed. Therefore, the following conditions (1) to (6) are stipulated in order to appropriately divide the roles between the used area and another area while ensuring the fairness of the gaming machine.

Condition (1), programs placed in different areas are used for the purpose of signal output (test processing for gaming machines) and fraud prevention (security-related processing) necessary for testing gaming machines, which impairs the fairness of the game. It should not be (damaged). Condition (2), the control area and the data area, which are different from the used area, should be placed in an explicitly distinguished area. Condition (3), the program to be placed in another area (another program) must be statically called from the program in the used area (used program) and then executed. In addition, the callee address must be clearly stated in the program list at that time. Condition (4), the program to be placed in another area should be modularized for each function, and when called, the contents of all registers used in the used area should be protected. Condition (5), access to RAM in each other's area from the used area or another area can only be referenced, and cannot be updated. Condition (6), it is not possible to call a subroutine in the control area of the used area from the control area of another area. Since a subroutine that performs interrupt processing is provided in the used area, it is necessary to prohibit interrupts when using a control area in another area. In order to properly execute the game control process, the time from the interrupt prohibition to the release of the interrupt prohibition must be within the interval (for example, 1.49 msec) of the interrupt process in the game control process. Must be. Therefore, when a subroutine that uses a control area of another area is called, the total time required for one call is set so as to be within the interrupt processing interval of the game control processing.

Further, a used area is allocated to the memory spaces of F000h to F1FFh of the main RAM 500c. Specifically, the work area for the game control process is allocated to the memory spaces of F000h to F13Fh, and is used for managing variables such as timers, counters, and flags. The stack area of the game control process is allocated to the memory spaces of F1C0h to F1FFh. Further, another area is allocated to the memory spaces of F200h to F3FFh of the main RAM 500c. Specifically, a work area for a part or all of the security-related processes is allocated to the memory space of F210h to F22Fh, and is used for variable management of timers, counters, flags, and the like. A stack area for a part or all of the security-related processes is allocated to the memory spaces of F230h to F246h.

Further, the input / output unit 704 is assigned to the memory spaces of FE00h to FEFFh. Conventionally, in order to access the device corresponding to the input / output unit 704, a 256-byte I / O space is provided independently of the memory space. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the MRQ and IORQ signals are eliminated, and the memory and the input / output unit 704 are commonly accessed by the RD and WR signals. Further, a U register is provided as hardware for designating the address of the upper 8 bits for accessing the device connected to the input / output unit 704, and the upper address of the 8 bits is specified in advance here. As a result, the I / O space provided independently of the memory space is integrated into the memory space to form one address space, and when the IN instruction and the OUT instruction are executed, the input / output unit 704 assigned to the memory space is executed. On the other hand, the upper 8 bits are specified by the U register, and the lower 8 bits are accessible by using the lower 8 bits specified by the operands of the IN instruction and the OUT instruction.

In this embodiment, the LDQ instruction uses the Q register to access the memory space (mainly the data area and work area), and the IN instruction and the OUT instruction use the U register to access the device (timer, random number generator, external input / output). You will be able to write programs to access the I / O of circuits, etc.). With such a configuration, it becomes easy to grasp the program at the time of design. In addition, the memory and I / O specified by the 16-bit address can be accessed by the lower 8-bit operand, and the program capacity can be compressed. Furthermore, by having a Q register, a Q'register, a U register, and a plurality of upper designated registers, the number of replacements due to reuse of the upper register is smaller than when there is only one upper register, and the program capacity is further compressed. be able to.

In the above example, the memory space corresponding to the I / O space is accessed by the IN instruction and the OUT instruction, but the memory space may be directly accessed by the IN instruction and the OUT instruction. This means that, for example, when accessing three 256-byte areas on the memory, the upper 8 bits of each are specified in the Q register, the Q'register, and the U register, and the LDQ instruction and the IN instruction OUT instruction each area. It can be realized by accessing.

Hereinafter, specific instruction codes (command groups) for realizing each of the above-mentioned processes (modules) will be described.

(Initialization start process)
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the initialization start process. The main CPU 500a in the slot machine 400 reads a program in the used area from the main ROM 500b and executes the read program. Then, by executing the STARTUP module, the initialization start process (S2021) of FIG. 86 is executed, and in the STARTUP module, the E_RMCLR module of another area is called as a subroutine, and in step S2021-9 of FIG. The RAM clear process is executed when the indicated setting is changed. The numerical value of step S in such a figure will be used only in the description of this figure.

As shown in FIG. 103A, the main CPU 500a sets the setting change end command indicating that the setting value change is completed in the transmission buffer (S2021-1), and sets the state when the setting value change is completed. The setting change status command shown is set in the transmission buffer (S2021-3), the initialization start wait timer is set (S2021-5), and the timer wait process that waits until the initialization start wait timer becomes 0 is executed. (S2021-7). In such steps S2021-1, step S2021-3, step S2021-5, and step S2021-7, interrupts are allowed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 500a executes a RAM clear process at the time of setting change to clear another area of the main RAM 500c (S2021-9), and a RAM clear process to clear the used area to be cleared at the time of setting change in the main RAM 500c. Is executed (S2021-11).

Here, since the E_RMCLR module called in step S2021-9 is located in another area, it is necessary to prohibit interrupts at the time of calling the module as shown in the above condition (6). Further, since both steps S2021-9 and steps S2021-11 are processes for sequentially clearing the memory values (step S2021-9 clears another area, step S2021-11 clears the used area), interrupts are performed. Must be banned. This is because if a timer interrupt occurs while clearing the memory, the clearing of some memory is completed and the subsequent memory is not cleared, so the value of the uncleared memory. This is because the process may not operate normally when is referenced. In addition, the value of the memory that has been cleared may be rewritten. Therefore, in steps S2021-9 and S2021-11, neither the timer interrupt nor the power interruption interrupt is allowed. Therefore, interrupts are disabled at least before step S2021-9, in which interrupts are not allowed, is started, and interrupts are disabled (allowed) after step S2021-11, in which interrupts are not allowed, is completed.

Then, the main CPU 500a sets a game state command indicating the current game state in the transmission buffer (S2021-13). In step S2021-13, interrupts are allowed.

When the E_RMCLR module is called in step S2021-9, the main CPU 500a sets the start address of another area of the main RAM 500c as shown in FIG. 103 (b) (S1), and clears the value of the main RAM 500c. Then (S2), the next address of the main RAM 500c is set (S3), and the set address of the main RAM 500c is confirmed (S4). Then, the main CPU 500a determines whether or not the clearing of another area of the main RAM 500c is completed based on the address of the main RAM 500c (S5). As a result, if the clearing of the other area of the main RAM 500c is not completed (YES in S5), the process from step S2 is repeated, and if the clearing of the other area of the main RAM 500c is completed (NO in S5), the said The E_RMCLR module is terminated and the routine returns to the next higher routine (S6).

Here, the E_RMCLR module is designed to satisfy all the above-mentioned conditions (1) to (6) in order to appropriately divide the roles between the used area and another area while ensuring the fairness of the gaming machine. ing. Therefore, not only interrupts are prohibited when the E_RMCLR module is called, but the values of general-purpose registers (A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register, F register) are saved. ..

FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a command for realizing the STARTUP module and the E_RMCLR module. Of these, FIG. 104 (a) shows a command group of a part of the STARTUP module (steps S2021-9 to S2021-13), and FIG. 104 (b) shows a command group of the E_RMCLR module. The flowchart shown in FIG. 103 is realized by, for example, the program shown in FIG. 104.

The index "STARTUP:" in the first line of FIG. 104 (a) indicates the start address of the STARTUP module. The command "DI" on the second line disables interrupts. Such an interrupt prohibition command is described in the used area because it must be executed at least before calling the E_RMCLR module in another area. The command "CALL E_RMCLR" on the third line calls the E_RMCLR module as a subroutine. The commands on the second and third lines correspond to steps S2021-9 in FIG. 103 (a).

When the E_RMCLR module is called in step S2021-9, the command group shown in FIG. 104 (b) is executed. The index “E_RMCLR:” in the first line of FIG. 104 (b) indicates the start address of the E_RMCLR module. By the command "EX AF, AF'" on the second line, the value of the pair register AF and the value of the pair register AF'which is the back register are exchanged, and the value of the pair register AF is saved. By the command "EXX" on the third line, the values of the pair registers BC, DE, and HL are exchanged with the values of the pair registers BC', DE', and HL', which are the back registers, and the values of the pair registers BC, DE, and HL are changed. It is evacuated. In this way, the values of the general-purpose registers (A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register, F register) are saved.

By the command "LD HL, @ EXT_RWM_TOP" on the fourth line of FIG. 104 (b), the fixed value "@ EXT_RWM_TOP", that is, the F210H which is the start address of another area of the main RAM 500c is read into the HL register. The command on the fourth line corresponds to step S1 in FIG. 103 (b). The command "XOR A" on the fifth line calculates the exclusive OR of the values in the A register, and holds the result in the A register. Therefore, 0 (zero) is held in the A register regardless of the value of the A register before the operation. The index "E_RMCLR01:" on the sixth line indicates the destination address of the command "JR NZ, E_RMCLR01" described later. By the command "LD (HL), A" on the 7th line, the value of the A register, that is, 0 is stored at the address indicated by the HL register. The command on the seventh line corresponds to step S2 in FIG. 103 (b). The value of the HL register is added by 1 by the command "INC HL" on the 8th line. The command on the eighth line corresponds to step S3 in FIG. 103. The command "CP HL, @ FIL_RMC_END" on the 9th line compares the value of the HL register with the fixed value "@FIL_RMC_END" indicating the final address to be cleared when the setting is changed in another area. That is, the zero flag is not set until the value of the HL register matches the fixed value "@FIL_RMC_END" (zero flag = 0), and when it matches, the zero flag is set (zero flag = 1). The command on the ninth line corresponds to step S4 in FIG. 104. The command "JR NZ, E_RMCLR01" on the 10th line moves to E_RMCLR01 if the zero flag is not set (if it is 0). The command on the tenth line corresponds to step S5 in FIG. 103 (a).

The command "EXX" on the 11th line of FIG. 104 (b) replaces the values of the pair registers BC, DE, and HL with the values of the pair registers BC', DE', and HL', which are back registers. The values of DE and HL are restored. By the command "EX AF, AF'" on the 12th line, the value of the pair register AF and the value of the pair register AF'which is the back register are exchanged, and the value of the pair register AF is restored. Then, the command "RET" on the 13th line returns to the routine one step higher. The command on the 13th line corresponds to step S6 in FIG. 103 (b). In this way, it is possible to clear another area of the main RAM 500c in another area.

Returning to the used area, the fixed value "@FIL_RNK_SET", that is, the file size of the buffer is read into the B register by the command "LD B, @ FIL_RNK_SET" on the fourth line of FIG. 104 (a). The fixed value "@FIL_RNK_SET" is represented by F200H-_CRE_CNT-256 = 501 (bytes). Here, "_CRE_CNT" indicates the address of the number of stored sheets indicating the start address of the buffer to be cleared. By the command "LDQ DE, LOW _CRE_CNT" on the 5th line, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_CRE_CNT" is set to the lower 1 byte of the address, and the value is stored at that address. The 2-byte value (the address of the number of stored sheets indicating the start address of the buffer to be cleared) is read into the DE register. Then, the command "RST MEMFILL" on the 6th and 7th lines calls the MEMFILL module as a subroutine.

Here, the MEMFILL module is a subroutine of the same processing used in executing a program, and is a general-purpose module that is frequently called from other modules in particular. In the MEMFILL module, at the time of entry, the file size to be cleared is stored in the B register, the file start address to be cleared is stored in the DE register, and a buffer for the file size up to 256 bytes from the start address ( Memory) is cleared.

As described above, the command "RST MEMFILL" is executed twice on the 6th and 7th lines because the target is 501 bytes, which is larger than 256 bytes. Here, first, the command "RST MEMFILL" on the 6th line clears the buffer for 245 (501-256) bytes from the address "_CRE_CNT", and the command "RST MEMFILL" on the 7th line starts from the subsequent address. Clear the buffer for the remaining 256 bytes. The value of the B register is set to 0 by the command "RST MEMFILL" on the 6th line, but in the MEMFILL module, if the value of the B register is 0, the calculation is started with the file size set to 256, so the total It is possible to clear 501 bytes. The commands on the 4th to 7th lines correspond to steps S2021-11 in FIG. 103 (a).

The interrupt is permitted by the command "EI" on the eighth line of FIG. 104 (a). Thus, in steps S2021-9 and S2021-11, while prohibiting both the timer interrupt and the power interruption interrupt, the interrupt can be permitted in the subsequent processing. Then, after returning from the subroutine, the command that allows interrupts is executed.

By the command "LDQ (LOW _WIN_DAT + 1), 001111111B" on the 9th line of FIG. 104 (a), the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, and the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_WIN_DAT" is added. The lower 1 byte of the address is used, and the fixed value 00111111B is stored in the address. The command "CALLF GMCMDST" on the 10th line calls the GMCMDST module that executes the game state command set processing.

Here, by arranging the E_RMCLR module that clears another area of the main RAM 500c in another area instead of the used area, a margin is generated in the storage area (capacity) of the used area by the amount of the E_RMCLR module. Therefore, it is possible to allocate the used area to the game control process (used program) accordingly. Here, we consider further reduction of the storage area in the used area.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing another example of the initialization start process. Here, the process of FIG. 103 (a) is changed as shown in FIG. 105.

As shown in FIG. 105, the main CPU 500a sets a setting change end command indicating that the change of the set value is completed in the transmission buffer (S2021-1), and changes the setting indicating the state when the change of the set value is completed. Set the status command in the transmission buffer (S2021-3), set the initialization start wait timer (S2021-5), and execute the timer wait process that waits until the initialization start wait timer becomes 0 (S2021-). 7). In such steps S2021-1, step S2021-3, step S2021-5, and step S2021-7, interrupts are allowed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 500a executes a RAM clearing process (S2021-11) that clears the used area to be cleared when the setting is changed in the main RAM 500c, and then the setting change RAM that clears another area in the main RAM 500c. The clear process is executed (S2021-9). Then, the main CPU 500a sets a game state command indicating the current game state in the transmission buffer (S2021-13).

In FIG. 105, as in FIG. 103 (a), neither the timer interrupt nor the power interruption interrupt is allowed in steps S2021-11 and S2021-9. Therefore, at least, the interrupt is prohibited before the step S2021-11 in which the interrupt is not allowed is started, and the interrupt is released (allowed) after the step S2021-9 in which the interrupt is not allowed is completed. However, in FIG. 105, unlike FIG. 103 (a), step S2021-9 is executed immediately before the interruption prohibition is released, and the E_RMCLR module is called. By doing so, the position (area) where the command "EI" is executed can be changed as shown below.

FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram for explaining another example of the command for realizing the STARTUP module and the E_RMCLR module. Of these, FIG. 106 (a) shows a command group of a part of the STARTUP module (step S2021-11, step S2021-9, step S2021-13), and FIG. 106 (b) shows a command of the E_RMCLR module. Shows a group. The flowchart shown in FIG. 105 is realized by, for example, the program shown in FIG. 106. Here, the description of the process substantially equal to that of FIG. 104 will be omitted, and only the process different from that of FIG. 104 will be described.

In the example of FIG. 104 (a), the command "CALL E_RMCLR" was executed immediately after the interrupt was disabled by the command "DI" on the second line. In the example of FIG. 106 (a), the command "CALL E_RMCLR" is not immediately after the interrupt is disabled by the command "DI", but immediately before the command "LDQ (LOW _WIN_DAT + 1), 00111111B" on the 9th line that allows the interrupt is executed. Is being executed. That is, in a state where interrupts are prohibited by the command "DI", the plurality of commands that do not allow interrupts shown in the 4th to 8th lines of FIG. 106A are executed, and 8 of the plurality of commands that do not allow interrupts. In the last command corresponding to the line, a subroutine in another area is called by the command "CALL E_RMCLR". Here, as a plurality of commands that do not allow interrupts, at least a command that does not allow interrupts is arranged at the end of the command group, and preparations for executing a command that does not allow interrupts are included in the command group (for example). It also includes commands that allow interrupts equivalent to (register settings).

Further, in the example of FIG. 104 (a), the command "EI" was executed immediately before executing the command "LDQ (LOW _WIN_DAT + 1), 00111111B" on the ninth line that allows interrupts, but the example of FIG. 106 Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the command "EI" (interrupt permission command) is executed before (one before) the command "RET" on the 14th line in the E_RMCLR module which is a subroutine is executed. .. Therefore, after returning from the subroutine, it is possible to immediately enable interrupts and then execute a command that allows interrupts.

Here, due to the specifications of the Z80 CPU, even if the command "EI" is executed when there is an interrupt request, the interrupt does not occur until the next instruction of the command "EI" is executed. That is, even if the command "EI" is executed before the command "RET" for returning from the E_RMCLR module which is a subroutine, the interrupt is appropriately permitted after the command "RET" is executed. Therefore, even if the command "EI" is described in a subroutine in another area, interrupts are permitted in the used area after returning from the subroutine.

In FIG. 104, the processing is executed in the order of command “DI” → memory clearing process in another area (step S2021-9) → memory clearing process in used area (step S2021-11) → command “EI”. .. On the other hand, in FIG. 106, the command “DI” → the memory clearing process in the used area (step S2021-11) → the memory clearing process in another area (step S2021-9) → the command “EI” in the E_RMCRR module. Processes are executed in the order of execution. By doing so, instead of adding the command "EI" to the command group of FIG. 104 (b) on the 13th line of FIG. 106 (b), it is described on the 8th line of FIG. 104 (a). The command "EI" can be deleted. Since the command "EI" has a command size of 1 byte, it is possible to secure 1 byte of the capacity of the used area instead of occupying 1 byte of the capacity of another area. In this way, although the capacity of another area having a relatively large margin is occupied, it is possible to secure the capacity of the used area having a relatively small margin.

(Setting value switching process)
Similar to the initialization start process described above, the capacity of the used area can be secured in the set value switching process.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the set value switching process. The main CPU 500a reads a program in the used area from the main ROM 500b and executes the read program. Then, by executing the RANKSET module, the set value switching process (S2020) shown in FIG. 85 is executed, and in the RANKSET module, the E_RMCLR module of another area is called as a subroutine, so that step S2020-in FIG. The RAM clearing process shown in 3 is performed.

As shown in FIG. 107, the main CPU 500a determines whether or not the set value switching condition is satisfied (S2020-1), and as a result, determines that the set value switching condition is not satisfied (S2020-1). If YES) in the above, the set value switching process is terminated, and if it is determined that the set value switching condition is satisfied (NO in S2020-1), the process is moved to step S2020-3. In step S2020-1, interrupts are allowed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 500a executes a RAM clear process at the time of setting change to clear another area of the main RAM 500c (S2020-3A), and a RAM clear process to clear the used area to be cleared at the time of setting change in the main RAM 500c. Is executed (S2020-3B). As can be understood with reference to FIG. 107, in step S2020-3, specifically, two processes of RAM clear process S2020-3A and RAM clear process S2020-3B at the time of setting change are executed in that order. .. Further, since the process of the E_RMCR module called in the RAM clear process S2020-3A at the time of setting change has already been described with reference to FIG. 103 (b), duplicate description will be omitted here.

Here, since the E_RMCR module called in step S2020-3A is located in another area as in the initialization start process, it is necessary to prohibit interrupts at the time of calling, as shown in the above condition (6). Further, since both step S2020-3A and step S2020-3B are processes for sequentially clearing the memory values (step S2020-3A clears another area, step S2020-3B clears the used area), interrupts are performed. Must be banned. Therefore, in step S2020-3A and step S2020-3B, neither the timer interrupt nor the power interruption interrupt is allowed. Therefore, interrupts are disabled at least before step S2020-3A, which does not allow interrupts, is started, and interrupts are disabled (allowed) after step S2020-3B, where interrupts are not allowed, is completed.

Then, the main CPU 500a sets the data table set processing (S2020-5) at the time of switching the setting value, sets the setting change start command (S2020-7), ..., Determines whether or not the setting key is on (S2020-37), and the figure. The process is transferred to the initialization start process S2021 shown in 86. In steps S2020-5 to S2020-37, interrupts are allowed.

FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a command for realizing the RANKSET module and the E_RMCLR module. Of these, FIG. 108 (a) shows a command group of a part (step S2020-3A, step S2020-3B, step S2020-5, step S2020-7) of the RANKSET module, and FIG. 108 (b) shows a command group. , E_RMCLR module command group is shown. The flowchart shown in FIG. 107 is realized by, for example, the program shown in FIG. 108.

The index “RANKSET:” in the first line of FIG. 108 (a) indicates the start address of the RANKSET module. The command "CALL E_RMCLR" on the second line calls the E_RMCLR module as a subroutine. The command on the second line corresponds to step S2020-3A in FIG. 107. At least, it is necessary to execute the interrupt prohibition command before calling the E_RMCLR module in another area. However, the RANKSET module is performed as a part of the CPU initialization process S2000, and when the RANKSET module is started, the interrupt is not yet in the permitted state. Therefore, when calling the RANKSET module in another area, it is not necessary to execute the command "DI" as shown in FIG. 104 (a) because the interrupt is already disabled.

When the E_RMCLR module is called in step S2020-3A, the command group of FIG. 108 (b) is executed. The index “E_RMCLR:” in the first line of FIG. 108 (b) indicates the start address of the E_RMCLR module. By the command "EX AF, AF'" on the second line, the value of the pair register AF and the value of the pair register AF'which is the back register are exchanged, and the value of the pair register AF is saved. By the command "EXX" on the third line, the values of the pair registers BC, DE, and HL are exchanged with the values of the pair registers BC', DE', and HL', which are the back registers, and the values of the pair registers BC, DE, and HL are changed. It is evacuated. In this way, the values of the general-purpose registers (A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register, F register) are saved.

By the command "LD HL, @ EXT_RWM_TOP" on the fourth line of FIG. 108 (b), the fixed value "@ EXT_RWM_TOP", that is, the F210H which is the start address of another area of the main RAM 500c is read into the HL register. The command "XOR A" on the fifth line calculates the exclusive OR of the values in the A register, and holds the result in the A register. Therefore, 0 (zero) is held in the A register regardless of the value of the A register before the operation. The index "E_RMCLR01:" on the sixth line indicates the destination address of the command "JR NZ, E_RMCLR01" described later. By the command "LD (HL), A" on the 7th line, the value of the A register, that is, 0 is stored at the address indicated by the HL register. The value of the HL register is added by 1 by the command "INC HL" on the 8th line. The command "CP HL, @ FIL_RMC_END" on the 9th line compares the value of the HL register with the fixed value "@FIL_RMC_END" indicating the final address to be cleared when the setting is changed in another area. That is, the zero flag is not set until the value of the HL register matches the fixed value "@FIL_RMC_END" (zero flag = 0), and when it matches, the zero flag is set (zero flag = 1). The command "JR NZ, E_RMCLR01" on the 10th line moves to E_RMCLR01 if the zero flag is not set (if it is 0).

The command "EXX" on the 11th line of FIG. 108 (b) replaces the values of the pair registers BC, DE, and HL with the values of the pair registers BC', DE', and HL', which are back registers. The values of DE and HL are restored. By the command "EX AF, AF'" on the 12th line, the value of the pair register AF and the value of the pair register AF'which is the back register are exchanged, and the value of the pair register AF is restored. Then, the command "RET" on the 13th line returns to the routine one step higher. In this way, it is possible to clear another area of the main RAM 500c in another area.

Returning to the used area, the fixed value "@FIL_RNK_SET", that is, the file size of the buffer is read into the B register by the command "LD B, @ FIL_RNK_SET" on the third line of FIG. 108 (a). The fixed value "@FIL_RNK_SET" is represented by F200H-_CRE_CNT-256 = 501 as described in FIG. 104 (a). Here, "_CRE_CNT" indicates the address of the number of stored sheets indicating the start address of the buffer to be cleared. By the command "LDQ DE, LOW_CRE_CNT" on the 4th line, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_CRE_CNT" is set to the lower 1 byte of the address, and the value is stored at that address. The 2-byte value (the address of the number of stored sheets indicating the start address of the buffer to be cleared) is read into the DE register. Then, the command "RST MEMFILL" on the 5th and 6th lines calls the MEMFILL module as a subroutine. As described above, the command "RST MEMFILL" is executed twice on the 5th and 6th lines because the target is 501 bytes larger than 256 bytes as explained with reference to FIG. 104 (a). Because. The commands on the 3rd to 6th lines correspond to steps S2020-3B in FIG. 107.

By the command "LD HL, T_RNK_SET" on the 7th line of FIG. 108 (a), the start address "T_RNK_SET" of the 1-byte data group as the transfer source is set in the HL register. The TABLEST module is called as a subroutine by the command "RST TABLEST" on the 8th line. The TABLEST module is a general-purpose module that sets a predetermined value (initial value) in a variable of the main RAM 500c. In this way, a predetermined value is set in the variable of the main RAM 500c. The commands on the 7th and 8th lines correspond to step S2020-5 in FIG.

When steps S2020-3A and S2020-3B, which should originally disable interrupts, are completed, the command "EI" should be executed to allow interrupts. However, in the TABLEST module, the command "DI" and the command "EI" are used. That is, since the command "EI" is executed in the TABLEST module, here, the command "EI" is not executed (describe) after the completion of steps S2020-3A and S2020-3B in which interrupts should be prohibited. ), The interrupt disabled state is maintained until the command "RST TABLEST" on the 8th line is executed, and the interrupt is permitted by effectively using the command "EI" executed in the TABLEST module. In this way, the command "EI" that should be described after the command "RST MEMFILL" on the sixth line of FIG. 108 (a) can be omitted.

The fixed value "@CMD_RNK_INI" is set in the DE register by the command "LD DE, @CMD_RNK_INI" on the 9th line of FIG. 108 (a). Specifically, a fixed value ECH (subcommand message 1) is set in the D register, and a lower byte of "_CMD_CHK" (subcommand message 2) is set in the E register. The SBCMDST module is called as a subroutine by the command "RST SBCMDST" on the 10th line. The SBCMDST module is a general-purpose module for setting subcommands. In this way, the subcommand is set. The commands on the 9th and 10th lines correspond to steps S2020-7 in FIG.

Here, by arranging the E_RMCLR module that clears another area of the main RAM 500c in another area, a margin is generated in the storage area (capacity) of the used area by the amount of the program moved to the other area. Therefore, it is possible to allocate the used area to the game control process (used program) accordingly. Here, we consider further reduction of the storage area in the used area.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing another example of the set value switching process. Here, the processing of FIG. 107 is changed as shown in FIG. 109.

As shown in FIG. 109, the main CPU 500a determines whether the set value switching condition is not satisfied (S2020-1), and as a result, if it is determined that the set value switching condition is not satisfied, the set value is determined. When the switching process is completed and it is determined that the set value switching condition is satisfied, the process is moved to step S2020-3B. In step S2020-1, interrupts are allowed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 500a executes a RAM clear process for clearing the used area to be cleared when the setting is changed in the main RAM 500c (S2020-3B), and a RAM clear process for clearing another area of the main RAM 500c when the setting is changed. Is executed (S2020-3A). Then, the main CPU 500a sets the data table set processing (S2020-5) at the time of switching the setting value, sets the setting change start command (S2020-7), ..., Determines whether the setting key is on (S2020-37), and shows in FIG. 86. The process is transferred to the indicated initialization start process S2021.

In FIG. 109, as in FIG. 107, neither the timer interrupt nor the power interruption is allowed in steps S2020-3B and S2020-3A. Therefore, interrupts are disabled at least before step S2020-3B, which does not allow interrupts, is started, and interrupts are disabled (allowed) after step S2020-3A, where interrupts are not allowed, is completed. However, in FIG. 109, unlike FIG. 107, step S2020-3A is executed immediately before the interruption prohibition is released, and the E_RMCLR module is called. By doing so, the position (area) where the command "EI" is executed can be changed as shown below.

FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram for explaining another example of the command for realizing the RANKSET module and the E_RMCLR module. Of these, FIG. 110 (a) shows a command group of a part (step S2020-3B, step S2020-3A, step S2020-5, step S2020-7) of the RANKSET module, and FIG. 110 (b) shows a command group. , E_RMCLR module command group is shown. The flowchart shown in FIG. 109 is realized by, for example, the program shown in FIG. 110. Here, the description of the process substantially equal to that of FIG. 108 will be omitted, and only the process different from that of FIG. 108 will be described.

In the example of FIG. 108 (a), the command "CALL E_RMCLR" for disabling interrupts was executed in a relatively early stage of the RANKSET module. In the example of FIG. 110 (a), the command "CALL E_RMCLR" is executed immediately before executing the command "LD HL, T_RNK_SET" on the eighth line that allows interrupts, instead of the previous stage of the RANKSET module. That is, in the interrupt-disabled state, the plurality of commands that do not allow interrupts shown in the 3rd to 7th lines of FIG. 110A are executed, and the last command of the plurality of commands that do not allow interrupts is the command. A subroutine in another area is called by "CALL E_RMCLR".

Further, in the example of FIG. 108 (a), the command "EI" was executed in the TABLEST module called by the command "RST TABLEST" on the eighth line that allows interrupts, but in the example of FIG. 110, the command "EI" was executed. As shown in FIG. 110 (b), the command "EI" (interrupt permission command) is executed immediately before the command "RET" on the 14th line in the E_RMCLR module which is a subroutine is executed. Therefore, after returning from the subroutine, it is possible to immediately enable interrupts and then execute a command that allows interrupts.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 106, due to the specifications of the Z80 CPU, even if the command "EI" is executed when there is an interrupt request, the next instruction of the command "EI" is executed. Until, no interrupt occurs. That is, even if the command "EI" is executed before the command "RET" for returning from the E_RMCLR module which is a subroutine, the interrupt is appropriately permitted after the command "RET" is executed. Therefore, even if the command "EI" is described in a subroutine in another area, interrupts are permitted in the used area after returning from the subroutine.

Here, in FIG. 108, processing is performed in the order of memory clear processing in another area (step S2020-3A) → memory clear processing in the used area (step S2020-3B) → command "EI" being executed in the TABLEST module. Was running. On the other hand, in FIG. 110, the memory clearing process in the used area (step S2020-3B) → the memory clearing process in another area (step S2020-3A) → the command “EI” is executed in the E_RMCLR module. To execute. By doing so, the following effects can be obtained. That is, in the command group of FIG. 108 (b), in order to avoid duplicate execution of the command "EI", the interrupt disabled state had to be maintained until the command "EI" was executed in the TABLEST module. In the example of (a), it is possible to allow interrupts at an appropriate timing such as immediately after the end of the command "CALL E_RMCLR" for which interrupts should be prohibited.

<Test signal>
By the way, in the slot machine 400, as the lamps displayed by the main control board 500, the main credit display unit 430, the main payout display unit 432, the section indicator 460, and the operation mode indicator lamp 462 (insertion number indicator, startable indicator). , Replay display, inputtable display). Of these, the main credit display unit 430, the main payout display unit 432, and the section display 460 must be provided due to the specifications, but the input number display, the startable display, and the replay, which are the operation mode indicator lamps 462, are required. The display and the inputtable display do not necessarily have to be provided, or may be displayed instead by the liquid crystal display unit 424 displayed by the sub-control board 502. Therefore, it is considered that the number of input display, the startable display, the replay display, and the inputtable display are not installed.

In this way, when the input number indicator, startable indicator, replay indicator, and insertable indicator are not provided, the display signals for turning them on or off (insertion number signal, startable signal, replay signal, input). It is no longer necessary to generate a possible signal). However, in the test processing of the slot machine 400 described in the connection specifications (fourth edition) of the tester for a rotating machine, the display signal (input number signal, startable signal, replay signal, inputtable signal) is used. It is necessary to output a test signal (input number signal, startable signal, replay signal, inputtable signal) synonymous with). However, if an attempt is made to randomly generate a test signal in the used area, the used area will be occupied and the capacity will increase unnecessarily.

Therefore, by using another area, it is possible to display these without increasing the capacity of the used area and without providing the input number indicator, the startable indicator, the replay indicator, and the insertable indicator. Even if the display signal is not generated, the test signal (input number signal, startable signal, replay signal, inputtable signal) is appropriately output based on a signal different from the display signal.

Here, the test process for a gaming machine can be executed in another area. Therefore, the test signal output process for outputting the test signal is executed by the E_EXOUT module described in another area. By doing so, a margin is created in the storage area (capacity) of the used area by the amount of the program moved to another area. Therefore, it is possible to allocate the used area to the game control process (used program) accordingly.

Among the display signals (input number signal, startable signal, replay signal, inputtable signal) for turning on or off the input number indicator, startable indicator, replay indicator, and insertable indicator, "insertion number signal" Is not the subject of the test signal. Therefore, it is assumed that the input number signal is not generated here.

The "startable signal" is supported by providing a 1-byte flag (hereinafter referred to as a startable flag (_STA_FLG)) in the used area of the main RAM 500c. For example, in the game medal insertion process (MEDALIN module) and the blocker blockage pre-processing (PRE_BLK module) without referring to the display signal, instead of turning on and off the startable indicator, the startable flag is turned on and off. Then, in the E_EXOUT module, the startable flag is referred to from another area and output as a test signal.

For the "replay signal", the replay operating flag (_REP_FLG), which is different from the display signal, is referred to. However, the replay operation flag is cleared when the motor phase is accelerating in the middle of one game, that is, when the reels 410a, 410b, 410c start rotating, and the replay signal cannot be maintained for one game. , Cannot be used as a test signal. Therefore, at the start of the game (for example, when the start switch 418 is operated), the content of the replay operating flag is duplicated in the replay signal output flag (_EC_RPFG) in another area of the main RAM 500c. Then, the replay signal output flag maintained in another area of the main RAM 500c is referred to from another area and output as a test signal.

Regarding the "insertable signal", the period during which the blocker is open is defined as the medal insertable period without referring to the display signal. Then, the blocker output signal stored in the used area of the main RAM 500c is referred to from another area and output as a test signal.

11 to 119 are explanatory views for explaining the test signal output process. The numerical value of step S in such a figure will be used only in the description of each figure. In the above embodiment, duplicate description will be omitted for the processes already described.

In the game medal insertion process S2200 shown in FIG. 111, as compared with the game medal insertion process S2200 shown in FIG. 89, a start enable flag is set instead of setting the start indicator output bit (S2200-25) (S2200). -25N). In this way, in the MEDALIN module that executes the game medal insertion process S2200, if the number of inserted medals reaches the specified number, the start enable flag is set (S2200-25N) on the condition that the start switch 418 is not operated. Will be done.

When the MEDALIN module is called, the command group shown in FIG. 112 is executed. The index "MEDALIN:" in the first line of FIG. 112 indicates the start address of the MEDALIN module. By the command "LDQ (LOW _STA_FLG), @TRUE" on the second line, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_STA_FLG" is set to the lower 1 byte of the address, and the address is set to that address. A fixed value @TRUE (here, -1 (FFH)) is stored. In this way, the startable signal (startable flag) can be turned on at the timing of lighting the startable indicator.

Here, the reason why the variable (startable flag) is set in the used area without placing the variable in another area of the main RAM 500c is as follows. That is, if the startable flag is set in another area, the subroutine in another area must be called, and the command size in the used area increases. For example, the command "DI" is incremented by 1 byte for each module. Further, even if an attempt is made to refer to a variable in the used area from another area, a startable signal cannot be generated because there is no variable indicating that the startable area is available.

Further, the MDL_SNS module is called by the command "CALLF MDL_SNS" on the third line of FIG. 112, which corresponds to the game medal detection related process S2200-18.

In the game medal detection-related process shown in FIG. 113 (a), medal detection and blocker opening / closing processing are performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 113A, the main CPU 500a subtracts the stored number of medals from the value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the maximum number of medals that can be inserted (S1), and the subtracted result is 0 (zero). It is determined whether or not there is a medal, that is, whether or not any more medals can be inserted (S2). As a result, if it is determined that medals can still be inserted (NO in S2), the number of medals that can be inserted is confirmed by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the maximum number of medals (S3), and whether or not the subtracted result is 0 (zero). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of insertable sheets is one remaining (S4). As a result, when it is determined that the number of insertable sheets is not one (NO in S4), the output bit corresponding to the blocker is set (S5). Further, when the result of subtracting the number of stored medals is 0 (zero), that is, when it is determined that no more medals can be inserted (YES in S2), and when it is determined that the number of medals that can be inserted is one remaining. (YES in S4), it is determined whether or not the blocker is blocked (S6). As a result, if the blocker is not blocked (NO in S6), the output bit corresponding to the blocker is reset (S7), and the blocker blocking process for turning off the startable signal (startable flag) is performed (S8).

The game medal detection-related processing of FIG. 113 (a) is realized by the command group of the MDL_SNS module shown in FIG. 113 (b). The index “MDL_SNS:” in the first line of FIG. 113 (b) indicates the start address of the MDL_SNS module. The command "SUB B" on the second line subtracts the value of the B register (the number of stored medals) from the value of the A register (the value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the maximum number of medals). The command on the second line corresponds to step S1 in FIG. 113 (a). If the zero flag (Z) is 1, the command "JR Z, BLKSHUT" on the third line moves to BLKSHUT (sixth line). The command on the third line corresponds to step S2 in FIG. 113 (a). The command "DEC L" on the third line subtracts the value of the L register (the number of inserted medals) from the value of the A register (the maximum number of medals). The command on the fourth line corresponds to step S3 in FIG. 113 (a). If the zero flag (Z) is 1, the command "JR Z, BLKSHUT" on the 5th line moves to the BLKSHUT (7th line). The command on the fifth line corresponds to step S4 in FIG. 113 (a). By the command "SETQ @ BLK_SIG_POS, (LOW _OUT_PT4)" on the 6th line, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_OUT_PT4" is set to the lower 1 byte of the address, and the address is set to that address. 1 is set (set) in the bit (for example, bit 3) indicated by @BLK_SIG_POS in the stored value. The command on the sixth line corresponds to step S5 in FIG. 113 (a). In this way, the blocker can be opened through the image value of the output port 4. Further, as will be described later, the input enable signal can be turned on at the turn-off timing of the start enable indicator according to the change in the image value of the output port 4.

The index "BLKSHUT:" on the 7th line of FIG. 113B shows the destinations of the 3rd and 5th lines. By the command "BITQ @ BLK_SIG_POS, (LOW _OUT_PT4)" on the 8th line, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_OUT_PT4" is set to the lower 1 byte of the address, and the address is set to that address. The bit (for example, bit 3) indicated by @BLK_SIG_POS in the stored value is determined. If the zero flag is set by the command "RET Z" on the 9th line, the MDL_SNS module is terminated and the module returns to the next higher module. The commands on the 8th and 9th lines correspond to step S6 in FIG. 113 (a). By the command "RESQ @ BLK_SIG_POS, (LOW _OUT_PT4)" on the 10th line, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_OUT_PT4" is set to the lower 1 byte of the address, and the address is set to that address. Set (reset) 0 to the bit (for example, bit 3) indicated by @BLK_SIG_POS in the stored value. The command on the tenth line corresponds to step S7 in FIG. 113 (a). In this way, the blocker can be closed through the image value of the output port 4. Further, as will be described later, the input enable signal can be turned off at the turn-off timing of the start enable indicator according to the change in the image value of the output port 4. By the command "CLRQ (LOW _STA_FLG)" on the 11th line, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_STA_FLG" is set to the lower 1 byte of the address, and 0 (zero) is set to that address. ) Is stored. The command on the 11th line corresponds to step S8 in FIG. 113 (a). In this way, the startable signal (startable flag) can be turned off at the timing when the startable indicator is turned off.

Further, the PRE_BLK module is called by the command "CALLF PRE_BLK" on the fourth line of FIG. 112, which corresponds to the blocker blockage pretreatment S2200-33 shown in FIG. 111.

In the blocker blockage preprocessing shown in FIG. 114A, the startable flag is cleared instead of setting the output bit of the startable indicator. When the PRE_BLK module that executes the blocker blockage preprocessing is called, the command group shown in FIG. 114 (b) is executed. The index “PRE_BLK:” in the first line of FIG. 114 (b) indicates the start address of the PRE_BLK module. By the command "CLRQ (LOW _STA_FLG)" on the second line, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_STA_FLG" is set to the lower 1 byte of the address, and 0 (zero) is set to that address. ) Is stored. In this way, the startable signal (startable flag) can be turned off at the timing when the startable indicator is turned off.

Further, similarly to the game medal insertion process S2200, the PRE_BLK module is also called in the error setting process S2011-3 shown in FIG. 84 and the credit button check process S2200-17 shown in FIG. 89.

In the error setting process shown in FIG. 115 (a), the PRE_BLK module that executes the blocker blockage preprocessing is called. When the SET_ERR module that executes the error setting process is called, the command group shown in FIG. 115 (b) is executed. The index “SET_ERR:” in the first line of FIG. 115 (b) indicates the start address of the SET_ERR module. The PRE_BLK module is called by the command "CALLF PRE_BLK" on the second line. In this way, the startable signal (startable flag) can be turned off at the timing when the startable indicator is turned off.

In the credit button check process shown in FIG. 116 (a), the PRE_BLK module that executes the blocker blockage preprocessing is called. When the CANCELM module that executes the credit button check process is called, the command group shown in FIG. 116 (b) is executed. The index “CANCELM:” in the first line of FIG. 116 (b) indicates the start address of the CANCELM module. The PRE_BLK module is called by the command "CALLF PRE_BLK" on the second line. In this way, the startable signal (startable flag) can be turned off at the timing when the startable indicator is turned off.

In the bonus signal setting process S2100-13 in the game start process S2100 shown in FIG. 88, the E_SGSET module in another region is called, and the bonus signal and the advantageous section signal are set. Here, as shown in FIG. 117A, the main CPU 500a acquires the replay operating flag (S1), and sets the replay signal output flag according to the acquired replay operating flag (S2). The game medal detection-related processing of FIG. 117 (a) is realized by the command group of the E_SGSET module shown in FIG. 117 (b). The index “E_SGSET:” in the first line of FIG. 117 (b) indicates the start address of the E_SGSET module. The replay operating flag (_REP_FLG) is stored in the A register by the command "LDA, (_REP_FLG)" on the second line. The command on the second line corresponds to step S1 in FIG. 117 (a). By the command "LD (_EX_RPFG), A" on the third line, the value of the A register, that is, the replay operating flag (_REP_FRG) is set in the replay signal output flag (_EX_RPFG) which is a variable. The command on the third line corresponds to step S2 in FIG. 117 (a).

Here, the replay operating flag (_REP_FRG) is set each time the game start process S2100 shown in FIG. 88 is executed. Then, the replay in progress flag will be updated only at the start of the game. In this way, even if the motor phase is accelerating, that is, the replay operating flag (_REP_FRG) is cleared when the reels 410a, 410b, 410c start rotating, until the next game start process S2100 is executed, that is, The replay signal can be maintained by the replay signal output flag (_EX_RPFG) until one game is completed.

In the timer interrupt process S3100 shown in FIG. 118 (a), the interrupt process is executed every 1.49 msec. When the TMR_IPT module that realizes the timer interrupt processing is called, the test signal output processing S3100-23 is executed. The index “TMR_IPT:” in the first line of FIG. 118 (b) indicates the start address of the TMR_IPT module. The E_EXOUT module is called by the command "CALL E_EXOUT" on the second line. In this way, the test signal can be set each time the timer interrupt process S3100 is executed.

In the test signal output process shown in FIG. 119 (a), the test signal is output. Here, as shown in FIG. 119 (a), the main CPU 500a acquires the startable flag (S1), acquires the output port 4 image (S2), acquires the replay signal output flag (S3), and outputs the output port. 3 The image is acquired (S4), and the test signal is output to the output port 8 (S5).

The test signal output process of FIG. 119 (a) is realized by the command group of the E_EXOUT module in another region shown in FIG. 119 (b). The index “E_EXOUT:” in the first line of FIG. 119 (b) indicates the start address of the E_EXOUT module. By the command "LDA, (_STA_FLG)" on the second line, the value of the startable flag set at the address indicated by "_STA_FLG" set in FIGS. 111 to 116 is stored in the A register. The startable flag is masked by the command "AND @ STA_SIG_BIT" on the third line, and the result of the startable flag is left only in the bit (for example, bit 5) indicated by "@STA_SIG_BIT". The commands on the second and third lines correspond to step S1 in FIG. 119 (a). In this way, the "startable signal" can be set.

The value of the A register is duplicated in the B register as a work register for superimposing signals by the command "LD B, A" on the fourth line of FIG. 119 (b). By the command "LDA, (_OUT_PT4)" on the fifth line, the image value of the output port 4 stored at the address indicated by "_OUT_PT4" set in FIG. 113 is stored in the A register. The command "JBIT Z, @ BLK_SIG_POS, A, E_EXOUT01" on the 6th line determines whether or not the bit (for example, bit 3) indicated by "@BLK_SIG_POS" in the A register (image value of output port 4) is zero. , If the bit indicated by "@BLK_SIG_POS" is zero, that is, if the blocker is blocked, the process proceeds to E_EXOUT01, and if it is not zero, the process proceeds to the next process as it is. The command "SET @ INS_SIG_POS, B" on the 7th line causes a bit of the value (for example, bit 6) defined by "@INS_SIG_POS" in the value of the B register to be set. The index "E_EXOUT01:" on the 8th line indicates the destination of the command "JBIT Z, @ BLK_SIG_POS, A, E_EXOUT01" on the 6th line. The commands on the 5th to 8th lines correspond to step S2 in FIG. 119 (a). In this way, the "input enable signal" can be set.

By the command "LDA, (_EX_RPFG)" on the 9th line of FIG. 119 (b), the value of the replay signal output flag stored at the address indicated by "_EX_RPFG" set in FIG. 117 is stored in the A register. .. By the command "JR TZ, E_EXOUT02" on the 10th line, if the value of the A register is 0, that is, if the replay signal output flag (_EX_RPFG) is not set, it moves to E_EXOUT02, and if it is not zero, it moves to E_EXOUT02 as it is. Move on to the processing of. The command "SET @ REP_SIG_POS, B" on the 11th line causes a bit of the value (for example, bit 7) defined by "@REP_SIG_POS" in the value of the B register to be set. The index "E_EXOUT02:" on the 12th line indicates the destination of the command "JR TZ, E_EXOUT02" on the 10th line. The commands on the 9th to 12th lines correspond to step S3 in FIG. 119 (a). In this way, the "replay signal" can be set.

By the command "LDA, (_OUT_PT3)" on the 13th line of FIG. 119 (b), the image value of the output port 3 stored at the address indicated by "_OUT_PT3" is stored in the A register. The command "AND 000001111B" on the 14th line masks the upper 4 bits of the image value of the output port 3 stored in the A register. The command "OR B" on the 15th line calculates the logical sum of the A register value (the image value of the masked output port 3) and the B register value aggregated up to the 12th line, and stores it in the A register. do. The commands on the 13th to 15th lines correspond to step S4 in FIG. 119 (a). Then, the command "OUT (@ OUT_PRT_8), A" on the 16th line outputs the value of the A register to the image value of the output port 8 stored at the address indicated by "@ OUT_PRT_8". In this way, the startable signal (bit 5), the replay signal (bit 7), and the input enable signal (bit 6) can be output as the test signal.

Here, since the test signal output process for outputting the test signal is executed by the E_EXOUT module described in another area, there is a margin in the storage area (capacity) of the used area by the amount of the program moved to another area. Occurs. Therefore, it is possible to allocate the used area to the game control process (used program) accordingly.

Further, in this way, the test signal can be output appropriately even if the input number display, the startable display, the replay display, and the input enable display are not provided without increasing the capacity of the used area. It will be possible.

Here, regarding the startable signal, the startable flag is operated in the used area without referring to the display signal for turning on or off the startable indicator, and the test signal is transmitted in another area based on the startable flag. Although the explanation is given with an example of generation, not only the startable signal but also the replay signal and the input enable signal are flagged by operating the flag in the used area without referring to the display signal for turning on or off the display. , In another region, a test signal may be generated based on the flag.

Further, here, among the display signals (input number signal, startable signal, replay signal, inputtable signal), an example in which a test signal is not generated for the input number signal has been described, but the input number signal is also a test signal. May be generated.

<Edge information>
FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating a signal input to the input port. In the slot machine 400, input ports 0 to 2 and output ports 0 to 8 are provided as input / output units 704. Various signals are input to the main CPU 500a via the input ports 0 to 2. Further, the main CPU 500a outputs various signals via the output ports 0 to 8. As shown in FIG. 120, each of the input ports 0 to 2 is composed of 8 bits (1 byte). Similarly, each of the output ports 0 to 8 is composed of 8 bits (1 byte). Since the signal input to the input ports 0 to 2 is a signal input with negative logic, 0 is input to the input ports 0 to 2 when the signal is on, and 0 is input when the signal is off. 1 is input to.

The signal of the stop switch 420a (stop switch 1 signal) is input to bit 0 of the input port 0. The signal of the stop switch 420b (stop switch 2 signal) is input to bit 1 of the input port 0. The signal of the stop switch 420c (stop switch 3 signal) is input to bit 2 of the input port 0. The signal of the fourth stop switch 420 (stop switch 4 signal) when there are four stop switches 420 is input to the bit 3 of the input port 0. The signal of the start switch 418 (start switch signal) is input to bit 4 of the input port 0. A signal (MAX switch signal) of the bet switch 416 is input to bit 5 of the input port 0. A signal (one-card insertion switch signal) of a one-card bet switch (not shown) for betting one medal is input to bit 6 of the input port 0. A setting change switch signal (setting change switch signal) is input to bit 7 of the input port 0.

A signal of the first medal passing sensor (medal passing sensor 1 signal) for detecting the passage of the medal inserted through the medal insertion port 414a is input to bit 0 of the input port 1. A signal of the second medal passing sensor (medal passing sensor 2 signal) for detecting the passage of the medal inserted through the medal insertion port 414a is input to bit 1 of the input port 1. A signal of an insertion detection sensor (insertion detection sensor signal) for detecting that a medal has been inserted into the medal insertion port 414a is input to bit 2 of the input port 1. A signal of a door opening switch (door opening switch signal) that is turned on when at least one of the front upper door 404 and the front lower door 406 is opened is input to bit 3 of the input port 1. A setting key switch signal (setting key switch signal) is input to bit 4 of the input port 1. An overflow sensor signal (overflow sensor signal) for detecting the overflow of the medal payout device 442 is input to bit 5 of the input port 1. A credit button signal (credit button signal) for paying out a credited medal is input to bit 6 of the input port 1. A signal of a payout sensor (payout sensor signal) for detecting medals to be paid out from the medal payout device 442 is input to bit 7 of the input port 1.

A signal of the first cylinder index sensor (first cylinder index sensor signal) for detecting the index of the left reel 410a is input to bit 0 of the input port 2. A signal of the second cylinder index sensor (second cylinder index sensor signal) for detecting the index of the middle reel 410b is input to bit 1 of the input port 2. A signal of the third cylinder index sensor (third cylinder index sensor signal) for detecting the index of the right reel 410c is input to bit 2 of the input port 2. A signal of the 4th cylinder index sensor (4th cylinder index sensor signal) for detecting the index of the 4th reel 410 when there are 4 reels 410 is input to the bit 3 of the input port 2. NS. A signal of an R shoot sensor (R shoot sensor signal) for detecting a medal passing through an R shoot connecting the medal insertion port 414a and the medal payout device 442 is input to the bit 4 of the input port 2. A power cutoff warning signal is input to bit 5 of the input port 2. A signal of an error release switch (error release switch signal) provided in the housing 402 (inside the front lower door 406) and operated to release an error is input to the bit 6 of the input port 2. Bit 7 of the input port 2 is a spare port, and no signal is input (unused).

As described above, a maximum of 24 signals can be input to the main CPU 500a via the input ports 0 to 2. Then, the main CPU 500a is an image (eight signals) input to the input port 0 in the error weight processing of steps S2020-9 (FIG. 85), step S2200-3 (FIG. 89), and step S2200-11. An edge check process for generating an edge information image (eight edge information) is executed based on.

Of the edge information images generated in the edge check process, the edge information of the setting change switch signal input to the bit 7 of the input port 0 is used in steps S2020-13 and S2020-25 (FIG. 85). Further, the edge information of the start switch signal input to the bit 4 of the input port 0 is used in steps S2020-33 (FIG. 85) and step S2200-27 (FIG. 89). Further, the edge information of the MAX switch signal input to the bit 5 of the input port 0 and the edge information of the single input switch signal input to the bit 6 of the input port 0 are obtained in step S2200-19 (FIG. 89). used.

Further, the main CPU 500a executes an edge clearing process for clearing the edge information image in steps S2100-15 (FIG. 88) and step S2200-15 (FIG. 89). Further, the main CPU 500a updates the previously acquired image of the input port 0 (previous image) in the state return process in step S2030.

FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the edge check process. The numerical value of step S in such a figure will be used only in the description of this figure.

In the edge check process, as shown in FIG. 121 (a), the main CPU 500a acquires the image of the input port 0 (S1), acquires and updates the previous image (S2), and confirms (generates) the edge information image. ) (S3), set the edge information image in the C register (S4), and return to the routine one step higher (S5).

The edge check process of FIG. 121 (a) is realized by the command group of the EDGECHK module shown in FIG. 121 (b). The index “EDGECHK:” in the first line of FIG. 121B indicates the start address of the EDGECHK module. By the command "LDQ A, (LOW_IN0_NEW)" on the second line, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, and the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_IN0_NEW" is set to the lower 1 byte of the address, which is shown at that address. The value (image of input port 0, this time image) is read to the A register. The command on the second line corresponds to step S1 in FIG. 121 (a).

By the command "LDQ HL, LOW _IN0_OLD" on the third line, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_IN0_OLD" is set to the lower 1 byte of the address, and the address is set to the HL register. Store. The command "LD C, (HL)" on the 4th line reads the value (previous image) stored at the address indicated by the HL register into the C register. The command "LD (HL), A" on the fifth line stores the value of the A register at the address indicated by the HL register. The commands on the 3rd to 5th lines correspond to step S2 in FIG. 121 (a).

The command "XOR A, C" on the 6th line calculates the exclusive OR of the value of the A register (image of input port 0) and the value of the C register (previous image), and holds the result in the A register. do. Here, due to the exclusive OR, only the bit different between the image of the input port 0 and the previous image becomes 1. The command "AND A, C" on the 7th line calculates the logical product of the value of the A register and the value of the C register, and holds the result in the A register. Here, only the bit that has been switched from off (1) to on (0) becomes 1 by the logical product of 1 (off) before switching and 1 by the exclusive OR, and from on (0) to off (1). The bit switched to is not 1. The commands on the 6th and 7th lines correspond to step S3 in FIG. 121 (a).

The value of the A register is stored in the C register by the command "LD C, A" on the 8th line. The command on the eighth line corresponds to step S4 in FIG. 121 (a). The command "RET" on the 9th line returns to the routine one step higher. The command on the ninth line corresponds to step S5 in FIG. 121 (a). In this way, the edge information image is updated (stored in the C register) based on the image of the input port 0.

FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the edge clearing process. The numerical value of step S in such a figure will be used only in the description of this figure.

In the edge clearing process, as shown in FIG. 122A, the main CPU 500a clears the edge information image stored in the C register (S1) and returns to the routine one step higher (S2).

The edge clearing process of FIG. 122 (a) is realized by the command group of the EDGECLR module shown in FIG. 122 (b). The index “EDGECLR:” in the first line of FIG. 122B indicates the start address of the EDGECLR module. The command "XOR A, A" on the second line calculates the exclusive OR of the values in the A register, and holds the result in the A register. Therefore, 0 (zero) is held in the A register regardless of the value of the A register before the operation. The value (0) of the A register is stored in the C register by the command "LD C, A" on the third line. The commands on the second and third lines correspond to step S1 in FIG. 122 (a). The command "RET" on the 4th line returns to the routine one step higher. The command on the fourth line corresponds to step S2 in FIG. 122 (a). In this way, the edge information stored in the C register is cleared.

FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the RECORDER module. The index "RECOVER:" in the first line of FIG. 123 indicates the start address of the RECORDER module. The LD_PORT module is read by the command "CALLF LD_PORT" on the second line. In the LD_PORT module, the image of input port 0 is stored in the A register. By the command "LDQ (LOW_IN0_OLD), A" on the third line, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_IN0_OLD" is set to the lower 1 byte of the address, and A is set to that address. Stores the register value (previous image).

By the way, in the slot machine 400, in addition to the input port 0, the edge information of the signals input to the input port 1 and the input port 2 may be acquired. For example, a start switch signal input to bit 4 of input port 0, a MAX switch signal input to bit 5 of input port 0, a single input switch signal input to bit 6 of input port 0, and input port 0. In addition to the setting change switch signal input to the bit 7, the edge information of the credit button signal input to the bit 6 of the input port 1 and the error release switch signal input to the bit 6 of the input port 2 is acquired. In some cases. In such a case, if the EDGECHK module shown in FIG. 121 (b), the EDGECLR module shown in FIG. 122 (b), and the RECOVER module shown in FIG. 123 are created for each input port, the capacity increases. do.

Therefore, in another example of the edge check process, among the signals input to the plurality of input ports, only the signals of the bits for which the edge information is acquired are collected to generate one image (1 byte image). The edge information of the signals input to a plurality of input ports is collected into one (1 byte) edge information image.

FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram illustrating another example of the edge check process. In the edge check process of another example, the main CPU 500a acquires an image of the input port 0 (S1) and masks the lower 4 bytes (S2) as shown in FIG. 124 (a). Then, the main CPU 500a acquires the image of the input port 1, determines whether the signal of the bit 6 is not 0 (S3), and if the bit 6 of the image of the input port 1 is 0 (NO in S3). , Bit 0 of the image masked in step S2 is set to 0 (S4). After that, the main CPU 500a acquires an image of the input port 2, determines whether bit 6 of them is not 0 (S5), and if bit 6 of the image of the input port 2 is 0 (NO in S5), the step. It is updated in S4 and bit 1 of the image is set to 0 (S6).

Then, the main CPU 500a acquires and updates the previous image (S7), confirms (generates) the edge information image (S8), sets the edge information image in the C register (S9), and sets the routine one step higher. Return (S10). By doing so, as shown in FIG. 124 (b), the edge information (credit button edge information) of the signal of bit 6 of the input port 1 is set to bit 0, and the edge information of the signal of bit 6 of the input port 2 is set. (Error release switch edge information) is set to bit 1, and edge information of the signals of bits 4 to 7 of input port 0 (start switch edge information, MAX switch edge information, 1-sheet input switch edge information, setting change switch edge information) Can generate a 1-byte edge information image in which is assigned to bits 4 to 7, respectively.

FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram for explaining another example of the EDGECHK module. The edge check process of FIG. 124 (a) is realized by the command group of the EDGECHK module shown in FIG. 125. The index “EDGECHK:” in the first line of FIG. 125 indicates the start address of the EDGECHK module. By the command "LDQ A, (LOW_IN0_NEW)" on the second line, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, and the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_IN0_NEW" is set to the lower 1 byte of the address, which is shown at that address. The value (image of input port 0) is read to the A register. The command on the first line corresponds to step S1 in FIG. 124 (a). The command "OR A, 00000111B" on the third line masks (sets to 1) the lower 4 bits of the image value of the input port 0 stored in the A register. Since the input port has negative logic as described above, the logical sum with 1 is the mask. The command on the third line corresponds to step S2 in FIG. 124 (a).

According to "JBITQ NZ, @ CAN_SWI_POS, (LOW_IN1_NEW), EDGECHK01" on the 4th line, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, and the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_IN1_NEW" is set to the lower 1 byte of the address. Of the values shown at that address (image of input port 1), if the bit (bit 6) indicated by the value "@CAN_SWI_POS" is not 0, it moves to the address indicated by the index "EDGECHK01", and if it is 0, it moves to the address indicated by the index "EDGECHK01". Move on to the next process as it is. The processing on the fourth line corresponds to step S3 in FIG. 124 (a).

By "RES @ CAN_EDG_POS, A" on the 5th line, the bit (bit 0) indicated by the value "@CAN_EDG_POS, A" among the values of the A register is set to 0. The processing on the fifth line corresponds to step S4 in FIG. 124 (a).

The index "EDGECHK01:" on the sixth line indicates the destination address of the above command "JBITQ NZ, @ CAN_SWI_POS, (LOW_IN1_NEW), EDGECHK01".

According to "JBITQ NZ, @ ERS_SWI_POS, (LOW_IN2_NEW), EDGECHK02" on the 7th line, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, and the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_IN2_NEW" is set to the lower 1 byte of the address. Of the values shown at that address (image of input port 2), if the bit (bit 6) indicated by the value "@ERS_SWI_POS" is not 0, it moves to the address indicated by the index "EDGECHK02", and if it is zero, it moves to the address. Move on to the next process as it is. The processing on the seventh line corresponds to step S5 in FIG. 124 (a).

By "RES @ ERS_EDG_POS, A" on the 8th line, the bit (bit 1) indicated by the value "@ERS_EDG_POS, A" among the values of the A register is set to 0. As a result, the image is stored in the A register this time. The processing on the eighth line corresponds to step S6 in FIG. 124 (a).

The index "EDGECHK02:" on the 9th line indicates the destination address of the above command "JBITQ NZ, @ ERS_SWI_POS, (LOW_IN2_NEW), EDGECHK02".

By the command "LDQ HL, LOW _INI_OLD" on the 10th line, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_INI_OLD" is set to the lower 1 byte of the address, and the address is set to the HL register. Store. The command "LD C, (HL)" on the 11th line reads the value (previous image) stored at the address indicated by the HL register into the C register. The command "LD (HL), A" on the 12th line stores the value of the A register at the address indicated by the HL register. The commands on the 10th to 12th lines correspond to step S7 in FIG. 124 (a).

The command "XOR A, C" on the 13th line calculates the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the C register (previous image), and holds the result in the A register. The command "AND A, C" on the 14th line calculates the logical product of the value of the A register and the value of the C register, and holds the result in the A register. The commands on the 13th and 14th lines correspond to step S8 in FIG. 124 (a).

The value of the A register is stored in the C register by the command "LD C, A" on the 15th line. The fifteenth command corresponds to step S9 in FIG. 124 (a). The command "RET" on the 16th line returns to the routine one step higher. The command on the 16th line corresponds to step S10 in FIG. 124 (a).

FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram for explaining another example of the EDGECLR module and the RECOVER module. Here, the module of FIG. 122 (b) is changed as shown in FIG. 126 (a). Here, the description of the process substantially equal to that of FIG. 122 (b) will be omitted, and only the process different from that of FIG. 122 (b) will be described.

The EDGECHK module is called by the command "CALLF EDGECHK" on the second line of FIG. 126 (a). In the EDGECHK module, the edge information image is stored in the C register.

Further, here, the module of FIG. 123 is changed as shown in FIG. 126 (b). Here, the description of the process substantially equal to that of FIG. 123 will be omitted, and only the process different from that of FIG. 123 will be described.

The EDGECHK module is called by the command "CALLF EDGECHK" on the second line of FIG. 126 (b). In the EDGECHK module, the value of the Q register is set to the upper 1 byte of the address, the value of the lower 1 byte of the address "_INI_OLD" is set to the lower 1 byte of the address, and the previous image is stored at that address by the command on the 12th line. ..

In this way, images are acquired from a plurality of input ports, and a part of the acquired images (signals having a predetermined bit number) is collected to generate one image (current image, previous image, edge information image). I made it. As a result, it is not necessary to generate an image for each input port, and it is not necessary to provide a module for generating the image, so that there is a margin in the storage area (capacity) of the used area. Therefore, it is possible to allocate the used area to the game control process (used program) accordingly.

<Extension of startup waiting time>
When the power is turned on, the main CPU 500a executes the above-mentioned CPU initialization process (FIG. 82). In the CPU initialization process, a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set as the wait processing time in step S2000-3, and it is determined in step S2000-7 whether the wait processing time has elapsed. This wait processing time is for waiting for a stable supply of power, and for the initial stage of the effect device such as the liquid crystal display unit 424 controlled by the sub-control board 502, the effect lamp 426, and the effect object (not shown). This is the time set to wait for the conversion process.

By the way, in recent years, the number of production devices such as a liquid crystal display unit 424 controlled by a sub-control board 502, a production lamp 426, and a production accessory (not shown) has increased, and the mechanism tends to be complicated. It is becoming more time-consuming to initialize the LCD.

Therefore, it is conceivable to extend the wait processing time from 3 seconds to, for example, 10.5 seconds. However, when the wait processing time is extended to 10.5 seconds, the front upper door 404 or the front lower door 406 is opened during that time, and there is a high possibility that fraudulent acts (so-called goto) are performed.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not at least one of the front upper door 404 and the front lower door 406 is opened before the wait processing time elapses, and at least one of the front upper door 404 and the front lower door 406 is opened. If so, output an external signal to improve security against fraudulent activity.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the CPU initialization process. The numerical value of step S in such a figure will be used only in the description of this figure. The CPU initialization process shown in FIG. 127 is a portion of the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. 82 that replaces steps S2000-3 to S2000-7, and is the same as the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. 82.

In the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. 127, the main CPU 500a sets 105 times as the number of repetitions (S1). Then, the main CPU 500a acquires the image of the input port 1 (S2) and outputs the image of the output port 2 (door open signal) (S3). After that, the main CPU 500a sets 45713 as a wait processing timer (S4) and acquires a power supply cutoff warning signal (input port 2) (S5). Then, the main CPU 500a determines whether the power off warning signal is on (S6), and if the power off warning signal is on (YES in S6), returns the process to step S1 and turns on the power off warning signal. If not (NO in S6), the wait processing timer is decremented by 1 (S7). After that, the main CPU 500a determines whether the wait processing timer is 0 (S8), returns the processing to step S5 if the wait processing time is not 0 (NO in S8), and if the wait processing timer is 0. (YES in S8), the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 (S9). Then, the main CPU 500a determines whether the number of repetitions is 0 (S10), and if the number of repetitions is not 0 (NO in S10), returns the process to step S2, and if the number of repetitions is 0. (YES in S10), the processes after step S2000-9 in FIG. 82 are executed.

When the number of repetitions is one, the image of the output port 2 output in step S3 is cleared in step S3100-21 (FIG. 98) in the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an INITIAL module. The CPU initialization process of FIG. 127 is realized by the command group of the INITIAL module shown in FIG. 128. The index "INITIAL:" in the first line of FIG. 128 indicates the start address of the INITIAL module. The index "INITIAL02:" on the second line indicates the destination address of the command "JBIT Z, @ PWF_SIG_POS, A, INITIAL02" described later.

The value "105" is stored in the B register by the command "LD B, 105" on the third line. The command on the third line corresponds to step S1 in FIG. 127. The index "INITIAL03:" on the fourth line indicates the destination address of the command "DJNZ INITIAL03" described later.

The command "INA, (@ IN_PRT_1)" on the fifth line reads the value (image of the input port 1) of the address indicated by the value "@IN_PRT_1" into the A register. The command on the fifth line corresponds to step S2 in FIG. 127. The value of the A register is bit-inverted by the command "CPL" on the sixth line. The command "AND A, @DOR_SWI_BIT" on the 7th line calculates the logical product of the value of the A register and the value "@DOR_SWI_BIT" (00001000B), and holds the result in the A register. Here, the values other than the door opening signal based on the door opening switch signal of bit 3 in the image of the input port 1 are set to 0. The command "OUT (@DOR_PRT_2), A" on the 8th line outputs the value of the A register to the address (output port 2) indicated by the value "@DOR_PRT_2". The commands on the 5th to 8th lines correspond to step S3 in FIG. 127.

The value "45713" is stored in the DE register by "LD DE, 45713" on the 9th line. The command on the ninth line corresponds to step S4 in FIG. 127. The index "INITIAL04:" on the 10th line indicates the destination address of the command "JR NTZ, INITIAL04" described later.

The command "INA, (@ IN_PRT_2)" on the 11th line reads the value (image of the input port 2) of the address indicated by the value "@ IN_PRT_2" into the A register. The command on the 11th line corresponds to step S5 in FIG. 127.

The command "JBIT Z, @ PWF_SIG_POS, A, INITIAL02" on the 12th line determines whether or not the bit (bit 5) indicated by the value "@PWF_SIG_POS" of the A register (image of the input port 2) is 0. , If the bit indicated by "@PWF_SIG_POS" is 0, that is, if the power off warning signal is on, the process proceeds to INITIAL02, and if it is not 0, the process proceeds to the next process as it is. The command on the 12th line corresponds to step S6 in FIG. 127.

The value of the DE register is decremented (subtracted) by the command "DEC DE" on the 13th line. Here, when the value of the DE register becomes 0, the second zero flag is set and becomes 1. The command on the 13th line corresponds to step S7 in FIG. 127. By the command "JR NTZ, INITIAL04" on the 14th line, if the second zero flag is not set, the process moves to INITIAL04, and if the second zero flag is set, the process proceeds to the next process as it is. The command on the 14th line corresponds to step 8 in FIG. 127.

The command "@ DJNZ INITIAL03" on the 15th line decrements (subtracts) the value of the B register by 1, and if the value of the B register is not 0, it moves to INITIAL03, and if the value of the B register is 0, it remains as it is. Move on to the next process. The command on the 15th line corresponds to steps S9 and S10 in FIG. 127.

Here, the main control board 500 is provided with a 32 MHz crystal oscillator, and the main CPU 500a switches the clock on / off when the signal output from the crystal oscillator changes from off to on. Therefore, in the main CPU 500a, 16 million clocks are engraved per second (operation timing is defined).

The command is set with the number of states, that is, the number of clocks for executing the command. In the example of FIG. 128, the number of states of the command on the third line is 7, the number of states of the command on the fifth line is 11, the number of states of the command on the sixth line is 4, and the number of states of the command on the seventh line. Is 7, the number of states of the command on the 8th line is 11, the number of states of the command on the 9th line is 10, the number of states of the command on the 11th line is 11, and the number of states of the command on the 12th line is 12. The number of states of the command on the 13th line is 4, the number of states of the command on the 14th line is 8/7, and the number of states of the command on the 15th line is 8/7. The number of states of the commands on the 14th and 15th lines is 8 when the command is branched (jumped) and 7 when the command is not branched.

When the INITIAL module shown in FIG. 128 is executed, the command on the third line elapses 7 states, that is, 7 clocks. Then, 11 + 4 + 7 + 11 + 10 = 43 states, that is, 43 clocks of time elapse with the commands on the 5th to 9th lines.

Then, the commands on the 11th to 14th lines are repeatedly executed 45713 times (loop processing is executed), but in the 1st to 45712th times, the number of states is 11 + 12 + 4 + 8 = 35 states, and 45713. The second time is 11 + 12 + 4 + 7 = 34 states. That is, the number of states when the commands on the 11th to 14th lines are repeated 45713 times is 35 × 45712 + 34 = 1599954 states. Then, the time for the main CPU 500a to execute the processing of the 1599954 state is about 100 ms (1599954/16000000 seconds).

Then, when the time for 1599954 clocks elapses, the command on the 15th line is executed without branching by the command on the 14th line, and the value of the B register (number of repetitions) is decremented by 1.

The number of repetitions is 105, but in the 1st to 104th times, the number of states of the command on the 5th to 15th lines is 43 + 159954 + 8 = 1600005, and in the 105th time, the command on the 5th to 15th lines. The number of states is 43 + 159954 + 7 = 1600004. Therefore, the total number of states of the module in FIG. 128 is 7 + 1600005 × 104 + 1600004 = 168000531. Since the main CPU 500a clocks 16 million times per second, the time elapsed when the module shown in FIG. 128 is executed is 168000531/16000000 = 10.5000331875 seconds. That is, the wait processing time is about 10.5 seconds.

Also, the rule stipulates that the door open signal must be continuously output for at least 50 ms, but in order to execute the command on the 8th line and then execute the command on the 8th line again, In the meantime, the commands on lines 11-14 must be repeated 45713 times. That is, about 100 ms time elapses until the door opening signal is updated.

Therefore, in the slot machine 400, the door opening signal can be continuously output for about 100 ms in the CPU initialization process, and the rule can be satisfied. In addition, the security against fraudulent activity can be improved by extending the wait processing time.

Further, access to the main RAM 300c is prohibited while the INITIAL module shown in FIG. 128 is being executed. Therefore, the image of the output port 2 (door open signal) is output without using the main RAM 300c.

FIG. 129 is a diagram comparing the input port 1 and the output port 2. As shown in FIG. 129, the external signal 4 (door open signal) of bit 3 of the output port 2 is output based on the door open switch signal of bit 3 of the input port 1. Here, the bit number at which the door open switch signal (predetermined signal) is input at the input port 1 and the bit number at which the door open switch signal based on the door open switch signal is output at the output port 2 are both bit 3. Set to the same. As a result, the door open switch signal of bit 3 of the input port 1 can be output by simply inverting the bit and outputting the door open switch signal without the need for shift processing or the like. As a result, there is a margin in the storage area (capacity) of the used area. Therefore, it is possible to allocate the used area to the game control process (used program) accordingly.

Although the case where the door opening signal is output as a predetermined signal has been described here, the predetermined signal may be another signal. Then, the bit number at which the predetermined signal is input at the input port and the bit number at which the signal based on the predetermined signal is output at the output port may be set to be the same.

Although the preferred embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the accompanying drawings, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. It is clear that a person skilled in the art can come up with various modifications or modifications within the scope of the claims, and it is understood that these also naturally belong to the technical scope of the present invention. Will be done.

100 Pachinko machine 300, 500 Main control board 300a, 500a Main CPU
300b, 500b main ROM
300c, 500c main RAM
330, 502 Sub control board 330a, 502a Sub CPU
330b, 502b sub ROM
330c, 502c, sub RAM
400 slot machine

Claims (2)

A gaming machine comprising a CPU, a ROM in which a program used in the CPU is stored, and a RAM in which variables updated by the program are stored on a predetermined board used for the progress of the game.
The CPU
Read the program from the ROM,
Based on the above program, execute multiple commands that do not allow interrupts in the interrupt-disabled state.
The last command of multiple commands that do not allow interrupts calls a subroutine in another area.
A gaming machine that executes an interrupt enable command before executing a return command of a subroutine in another area. A gaming machine comprising a CPU, a ROM in which a program used in the CPU is stored, and a RAM in which variables updated by the program are stored on a predetermined board used for the progress of the game.
The CPU
Read the program from the ROM,
Based on the above program, execute multiple commands that do not allow interrupts in the interrupt-disabled state.
The last command of multiple commands that do not allow interrupts calls a subroutine in another area.
Execute the interrupt enable command before executing the return command of the subroutine in the other area.
A gaming machine that executes a command that allows interrupts after returning from the subroutine.

Images